EP1304920A2 - Transgenic mice containing targeted gene disruptions - Google Patents

Transgenic mice containing targeted gene disruptions

Info

Publication number
EP1304920A2
EP1304920A2 EP01918805A EP01918805A EP1304920A2 EP 1304920 A2 EP1304920 A2 EP 1304920A2 EP 01918805 A EP01918805 A EP 01918805A EP 01918805 A EP01918805 A EP 01918805A EP 1304920 A2 EP1304920 A2 EP 1304920A2
Authority
EP
European Patent Office
Prior art keywords
gene
agent
transgenic mouse
disruption
abnormality
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Withdrawn
Application number
EP01918805A
Other languages
German (de)
French (fr)
Inventor
Keith D. Allen
Catherine Guenther
Russell Phillips
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Deltagen Inc
Original Assignee
Deltagen Inc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Deltagen Inc filed Critical Deltagen Inc
Publication of EP1304920A2 publication Critical patent/EP1304920A2/en
Withdrawn legal-status Critical Current

Links

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12NMICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
    • C12N15/00Mutation or genetic engineering; DNA or RNA concerning genetic engineering, vectors, e.g. plasmids, or their isolation, preparation or purification; Use of hosts therefor
    • C12N15/09Recombinant DNA-technology
    • C12N15/63Introduction of foreign genetic material using vectors; Vectors; Use of hosts therefor; Regulation of expression
    • C12N15/79Vectors or expression systems specially adapted for eukaryotic hosts
    • C12N15/85Vectors or expression systems specially adapted for eukaryotic hosts for animal cells
    • C12N15/8509Vectors or expression systems specially adapted for eukaryotic hosts for animal cells for producing genetically modified animals, e.g. transgenic
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A01AGRICULTURE; FORESTRY; ANIMAL HUSBANDRY; HUNTING; TRAPPING; FISHING
    • A01KANIMAL HUSBANDRY; CARE OF BIRDS, FISHES, INSECTS; FISHING; REARING OR BREEDING ANIMALS, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; NEW BREEDS OF ANIMALS
    • A01K67/00Rearing or breeding animals, not otherwise provided for; New breeds of animals
    • A01K67/027New breeds of vertebrates
    • A01K67/0275Genetically modified vertebrates, e.g. transgenic
    • A01K67/0276Knockout animals
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07KPEPTIDES
    • C07K14/00Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof
    • C07K14/435Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from animals; from humans
    • C07K14/705Receptors; Cell surface antigens; Cell surface determinants
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07KPEPTIDES
    • C07K14/00Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof
    • C07K14/435Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from animals; from humans
    • C07K14/705Receptors; Cell surface antigens; Cell surface determinants
    • C07K14/70567Nuclear receptors, e.g. retinoic acid receptor [RAR], RXR, nuclear orphan receptors
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07KPEPTIDES
    • C07K14/00Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof
    • C07K14/435Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from animals; from humans
    • C07K14/705Receptors; Cell surface antigens; Cell surface determinants
    • C07K14/715Receptors; Cell surface antigens; Cell surface determinants for cytokines; for lymphokines; for interferons
    • C07K14/7158Receptors; Cell surface antigens; Cell surface determinants for cytokines; for lymphokines; for interferons for chemokines
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07KPEPTIDES
    • C07K14/00Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof
    • C07K14/435Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from animals; from humans
    • C07K14/705Receptors; Cell surface antigens; Cell surface determinants
    • C07K14/72Receptors; Cell surface antigens; Cell surface determinants for hormones
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07KPEPTIDES
    • C07K14/00Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof
    • C07K14/435Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from animals; from humans
    • C07K14/705Receptors; Cell surface antigens; Cell surface determinants
    • C07K14/72Receptors; Cell surface antigens; Cell surface determinants for hormones
    • C07K14/723G protein coupled receptor, e.g. TSHR-thyrotropin-receptor, LH/hCG receptor, FSH receptor
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12NMICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
    • C12N15/00Mutation or genetic engineering; DNA or RNA concerning genetic engineering, vectors, e.g. plasmids, or their isolation, preparation or purification; Use of hosts therefor
    • C12N15/09Recombinant DNA-technology
    • C12N15/63Introduction of foreign genetic material using vectors; Vectors; Use of hosts therefor; Regulation of expression
    • C12N15/79Vectors or expression systems specially adapted for eukaryotic hosts
    • C12N15/85Vectors or expression systems specially adapted for eukaryotic hosts for animal cells
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12NMICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
    • C12N9/00Enzymes; Proenzymes; Compositions thereof; Processes for preparing, activating, inhibiting, separating or purifying enzymes
    • C12N9/10Transferases (2.)
    • C12N9/13Transferases (2.) transferring sulfur containing groups (2.8)
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12NMICROORGANISMS OR ENZYMES; COMPOSITIONS THEREOF; PROPAGATING, PRESERVING, OR MAINTAINING MICROORGANISMS; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING; CULTURE MEDIA
    • C12N9/00Enzymes; Proenzymes; Compositions thereof; Processes for preparing, activating, inhibiting, separating or purifying enzymes
    • C12N9/14Hydrolases (3)
    • C12N9/16Hydrolases (3) acting on ester bonds (3.1)
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A01AGRICULTURE; FORESTRY; ANIMAL HUSBANDRY; HUNTING; TRAPPING; FISHING
    • A01KANIMAL HUSBANDRY; CARE OF BIRDS, FISHES, INSECTS; FISHING; REARING OR BREEDING ANIMALS, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; NEW BREEDS OF ANIMALS
    • A01K2217/00Genetically modified animals
    • A01K2217/07Animals genetically altered by homologous recombination
    • A01K2217/072Animals genetically altered by homologous recombination maintaining or altering function, i.e. knock in
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A01AGRICULTURE; FORESTRY; ANIMAL HUSBANDRY; HUNTING; TRAPPING; FISHING
    • A01KANIMAL HUSBANDRY; CARE OF BIRDS, FISHES, INSECTS; FISHING; REARING OR BREEDING ANIMALS, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; NEW BREEDS OF ANIMALS
    • A01K2217/00Genetically modified animals
    • A01K2217/07Animals genetically altered by homologous recombination
    • A01K2217/075Animals genetically altered by homologous recombination inducing loss of function, i.e. knock out
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A01AGRICULTURE; FORESTRY; ANIMAL HUSBANDRY; HUNTING; TRAPPING; FISHING
    • A01KANIMAL HUSBANDRY; CARE OF BIRDS, FISHES, INSECTS; FISHING; REARING OR BREEDING ANIMALS, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; NEW BREEDS OF ANIMALS
    • A01K2217/00Genetically modified animals
    • A01K2217/20Animal model comprising regulated expression system
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A01AGRICULTURE; FORESTRY; ANIMAL HUSBANDRY; HUNTING; TRAPPING; FISHING
    • A01KANIMAL HUSBANDRY; CARE OF BIRDS, FISHES, INSECTS; FISHING; REARING OR BREEDING ANIMALS, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; NEW BREEDS OF ANIMALS
    • A01K2227/00Animals characterised by species
    • A01K2227/10Mammal
    • A01K2227/105Murine
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A01AGRICULTURE; FORESTRY; ANIMAL HUSBANDRY; HUNTING; TRAPPING; FISHING
    • A01KANIMAL HUSBANDRY; CARE OF BIRDS, FISHES, INSECTS; FISHING; REARING OR BREEDING ANIMALS, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; NEW BREEDS OF ANIMALS
    • A01K2267/00Animals characterised by purpose
    • A01K2267/03Animal model, e.g. for test or diseases
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A01AGRICULTURE; FORESTRY; ANIMAL HUSBANDRY; HUNTING; TRAPPING; FISHING
    • A01KANIMAL HUSBANDRY; CARE OF BIRDS, FISHES, INSECTS; FISHING; REARING OR BREEDING ANIMALS, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; NEW BREEDS OF ANIMALS
    • A01K2267/00Animals characterised by purpose
    • A01K2267/03Animal model, e.g. for test or diseases
    • A01K2267/0393Animal model comprising a reporter system for screening tests

Definitions

  • 60/216,249 filed July 6, 2000; U.S. Application No. 60/216,264, filed July 6, 2000; U.S. Application No. 60/216,765, filed July 6, 2000; U.S. Application No. 60/218,075, filed July 12, 2000; U.S. Application No. 60/219,167, filed July 19, 2000; U.S. Application No. 60/219,182, filed July 19, 2000; U.S. Application No. 60/221,485, filed July 27, 2000; and U.S. Application No. 60/223,173, filed August 7, 2000.
  • the present invention relates to transgenic animals, compositions and methods relating to the characterization of gene function.
  • mice are important tools for understanding the role of genes. More particularly, the ability to develop animals with specific genes altered or inactivated has been invaluable to the study of gene function, and has lead to unexpected discoveries of a gene and/or mechanisms responsible for disease with similar manifestations in humans. These genetically engineered animals are also useful for identifying and testing therapeutic treatments for a variety of diseases and disorders.
  • GPCRs G-protein coupled receptors
  • TM1, TM2, TM3, TM4, TM5, TM6, and TM7 seven putative transmembrane domains, which are believed to represent transmembrane ⁇ -helices connected by extracellular or cytoplasmic loops.
  • G-protein coupled receptors have single conserved cysteine residues in each of the first two extracellular loops which form disulfide bonds that are believed to stabilize functional protein structure.
  • G-protein coupled receptors can be intracellularly coupled by heterotrimeric G-proteins to various intracellular enzymes, ion channels and transporters. Different G-protein ⁇ -subunits preferentially stimulate particular effectors to modulate various biological functions in a cell.
  • the retina-specific nuclear receptor may be a potential regulator of cellular retinaldehyde-binding protein expressed in retinal pigment epithelium and glial cells. Such genes have been postulated to regulate the visual cycle through its interaction with cellular retinaldehyde binding protein.
  • a lymphoid-specific member of the GPCR family has been identified by PCR with degenerate oligonucleotides. (Genomics 23(3), 643-50 (1994)).
  • This receptor reported as the Epstein-Barr-induced cDNA EBIl, is expressed in normal lymphoid tissues and in several B- and T-lymphocyte cell lines.
  • the gene is encoded on human chromosome 17ql2-q21.2. None of the other G-protein-coupled receptors has been mapped to this region, but the C-C chemokine family has been mapped to 17ql l-q21.
  • the mouse EBIl cDNA has also been isolated and encodes a protein with 86% identity to the human homolog.
  • the murine EBIl is a C-C chemokine type 7 receptor (variously referred to as CCR-7, C-C CKR-7 or CC-CKR- 7). Although its gene structure may be known, the function and ligand EBIl are unknown. Melanocyte stimulating hormones (MSH) regulates pigmentation function. This peptide also has a variety of biological activities in other areas, including the brain, the pituitary, and the immune system.
  • the murine melanocyte stimulating hormone receptor (MSH-R) mRNA has been cloned (1260 bp) and found to define a subfamily of receptors coupled to guanine nucleotide-binding proteins that may include the cannabinoid receptor (Science 257(5074), 1248-1251 (1992)).
  • Phosphatases represent unique and attractive targets for small-molecule inhibition and pharmacological intervention.
  • the protein phosphorylation/dephosphorylation cycle is one of the major regulatory mechanisms employed by eukaryotic cells to control cellular activities including growth and differentiation, cell-to-cell contacts, the cell cycle, and oncogenesis. It is estimated that more than 10% of the active proteins in a typical mammalian cell are phosphorylated.
  • phosphate groups are transferred from adenosine triphosphate (ATP) molecules to a protein by protein kinases and are removed from the protein by protein phosphatases.
  • ATP adenosine triphosphate
  • phosphatase inhibitors have been shown to induce apoptosis in myeloid leukemia cells (J. Cell. Physiol. 150, 484 (1992)) and in rat hepatocytes, rat pituitary adenoma cell, human mammary carcinoma cells and human neuroblastoma cells (Exp. Cell Res. 195, 237 (1991)).
  • Magnesium dependent protein phosphatases appears to participate in a wide variety of functions including regulating cAMP-activated protein-kinase activity, Ca 2+ -dependent signal transduction, tRNA splicing, and signal transmission related to heat shock responses.
  • PP2C-alpha (Gl or NID Number: 532678; Accession Number: D28117) is a 1387 bp sequence which encodes a protein of 382 amino acids with a calculated molecular mass of 42,432 Da (Gene 145(2), 311-312 (1994)).
  • GPCR subfamily is the chemokine receptor family which are known as chemotactic cytokines. The mechanism of chemokine action involves initial specific binding to seven transmembrane spanning GPCRs on target cells.
  • chemokines The central role of chemokines in inflammatory reactions has been demonstrated by numerous studies. Local administration of alpha chemokines, e.g., IL-8, by subcutaneous injection results in acute inflammatory reactions that are dominated by neutrophil infiltration. Recently, the cloning of a rat CXC chemokine receptorl (CXCR1) gene has been reported (J. Biol. Chem. 271(51), 32770-6 (1996)).
  • This CXCR1 gene (Gl or NED number: 1589930; Accession number: U7 089) is homologous to the human interleukin-8 (IL-8) receptors, having an amino acid sequence approximately 70-85% identical to the human IL-8 A and B receptor subtypes, and homologous also to the murine CXCR1 gene.
  • IL-8 interleukin-8
  • Phosphodiesterases are a class of enzymes responsible for the degradation of phosphodiester bonds.
  • cyclic nucleotide phosphodiesterases show specificity for purine cyclic nucleotide substrates and hydrolyze cyclic adenosine monophosphate (cAMP) and cyclic guanosine monophosphate (cGMP) (Pharmac. Ther. 51, 13-33 (1991)).
  • CN-PDEs regulate the steady-state levels of cAMP and cGMP and modulate both the amplitude and duration of cyclic nucleotide signals.
  • cAMP and cGMP are important "second messenger" molecules in signal transduction, the general process by which cells respond to extracellular signals (hormones, drugs, neurotransmitters, growth and differentiation factors, and other agents). Signal transduction regulates all types of cell functions including cell proliferation, differentiation, and gene transcription. At least eight different but homologous gene subfamilies of CN-PDEs are currently known to exist in mammalian tissues.
  • PDE6 retinal phototransduction
  • ⁇ and ⁇ catalytic alpha and beta subunits
  • inhibitory gamma
  • PDE6 defects have been associated with hereditary retinal degenerative diseases, characterized by retinal degeneration.
  • PDE6 defects have been associated with hereditary retinal degenerative diseases, characterized by retinal degeneration.
  • PDE6 defects have been associated with hereditary retinal degenerative diseases, characterized by retinal degeneration.
  • PDE6 defects have been associated with hereditary retinal degenerative diseases, characterized by retinal degeneration.
  • PDE6 defects have been associated with hereditary retinal degenerative diseases, characterized by retinal degeneration.
  • PDE6 phosphodiesterases
  • RD retinal degeneration
  • RP retinitis pigmentosa
  • the metabolism of many drugs, xenobiotics, neurotransmitters and hormones includes a step involving the enzymatic addition of a sulfate (S0 4 ) group.
  • S0 4 sulfate
  • the addition of a sulfate group is commonly referred to as sulfate conjugation, or simply sulfation.
  • the enzymes responsible for sulfate conjugation are known as sulfotransferases (or ST's), as they act by transferring a sulfate group from one biological molecule (the sulfate donor) to another (the sulfate acceptor) in a sulfotransferase reaction.
  • Cytosolic sulfotransferase enzymes in human liver have been subjected to intensive research because sulfation increases the water solubility of most compounds and, therefore, their renal excretion. Sulfation also usually results in a decrease in biological activity.
  • sulfate conjugation is required to activate drugs such as the antihypertensive medication minoxidil (Biochem. Pharmacol., 31 , 2949-2954 (1982)), and it can also play a role in the bioactivation of procarcinogens such as hydroxylarylamines (Science, 215, 403 (1982); Chem. Biol. Interact. 109, 221-35 (1998)).
  • the cDNA sequence (1269 bp) of the mouse liver phenol/aryl form of sulfotransferase has been determined (Biochim. Biophys. Acta 1171(3), 315-8 (1993)).
  • the cloned cDNA was reported to contain an 897 nucleotide open reading frame (ORF) beginning at nucleotide 65, which encodes a 298 amino acid polypeptide of 34.7 kD.
  • the STp l gene has Gl or NH ) number 201069 and Accession number L02331.
  • the human STpl gene has been extensively characterized (Pharmaco genetics 6, 473-487 (1996); Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun. 228, 134-140 (1996)).
  • the STpl gene is also referred to as the SULT1A1 gene.
  • Experimental animal models would provide an important tool in understanding the roles of retina-specific nuclear receptor genes, lymphoid-specific GPCR genes, melanocyte stimulating hormone receptor genes, magnesium-dependent protein phosphatase genes, chemokine receptor 1-like protein genes, cGMP phosphodiesterase genes and sulfotransferase genes. Such understanding of their roles may permit the definition of disease pathways, the identification of diagnostically and therapeutically useful targets, and the testing and investigating of potential therapeutic treatments.
  • the present invention generally relates to transgenic animals, as well as to compositions and methods relating to the characterization of gene function. More specifically, the present invention relates to various genes and their in vivo characterization and function.
  • the present invention provides transgenic cells comprising a disruption in a target gene.
  • the transgenic cells of the present invention are comprised of any cells capable of undergoing homologous recombination.
  • the cells of the present invention are stem cells and more preferably, embryonic stem (ES) cells, and most preferably, murine ES cells.
  • the transgenic cells are produced by introducing a targeting construct into a stem cell to produce a homologous recombinant, resulting in a mutation of the target gene.
  • the transgenic cells are derived from the transgenic animals described below.
  • the cell derived from the transgenic animals includes cells that are isolated or present in a tissue or organ, and any cell lines or any progeny thereof.
  • the present invention also provides a targeting construct and methods of producing the targeting construct that when introduced into stem cells produces a homologous recombinant.
  • the targeting construct of the present invention comprises first and second polynucleotide sequences that are homologous to the target gene.
  • the targeting construct also comprises a polynucleotide sequence that encodes a selectable marker that is preferably positioned between the two different homologous polynucleotide sequences in the construct.
  • the targeting construct may also comprise other regulatory elements that may enhance homologous recombination.
  • the present invention further provides non-human transgenic animals and methods of producing such non-human transgenic animals comprising a disruption in a target gene.
  • the transgenic animals of the present invention include transgenic animals that are heterozygous and homozygous for a mutation in the target gene.
  • the transgenic animals of the present invention are defective in the function of the target gene.
  • the transgenic animals of the present invention comprise a phenotype associated with having a mutation in a target gene.
  • the present invention also provides methods of identifying agents capable of affecting a phenotype of a transgenic animal. For example, a putative agent is administered to the transgenic animal and a response of the transgenic animal to the putative agent is measured and compared to the response of a "normal" or wild type mouse, or alternatively compared to a transgenic animal control (without agent administration). The invention further provides agents identified according to such methods. The present invention also provides methods of identifying agents useful as therapeutic agents for treating conditions associated with a disruption of the target gene.
  • the present invention further provides a method of identifying agents having an effect on target gene expression or function.
  • the method includes administering an effective amount of the agent to a transgenic animal, preferably a mouse, having a disruption in a target gene.
  • the method includes measuring a response of the transgenic animal, for example, to the agent, and comparing the response of the transgenic animal to a control animal, which may be, for example, a wild-type animal or alternatively, a transgenic animal control.
  • Compounds that may have an effect on gene expression or function may also be screened against cells in cell-based assays, for example, to identify such compounds.
  • the invention also provides cell lines comprising nucleic acid sequences of a target gene.
  • Such cell lines may be capable of expressing such sequences by virtue of operable linkage to a promoter functional in the cell line.
  • expression of the target gene sequence is under the control of an inducible promoter.
  • methods of identifying agents that interact with the target gene comprising the steps of contacting the target gene with an agent and detecting an agent/target gene complex. Such complexes can be detected by, for example, measuring expression of an operably linked detectable marker.
  • the invention further provides methods of treating diseases or conditions associated with a disruption in a target gene, and more particularly, to a disruption in the expression or function of the target gene.
  • methods of the present invention involve treating diseases or conditions associated with a disruption in the target gene's expression or function, including administering to a subject in need, a therapeutic agent which effects target gene expression or function.
  • the method comprises administration of a therapeutically effective amount of a natural, synthetic, semi-synthetic, or recombinant target gene, target gene products or fragments thereof as well as natural, synthetic, semi-synthetic or recombinant analogs.
  • the present invention further provides methods of treating diseases or conditions associated with disrupted targeted gene expression or function, wherein the methods comprise detecting and replacing through gene therapy mutated target genes.
  • gene refers to (a) a gene containing at least one of the DNA sequences disclosed herein; (b) any DNA sequence that encodes the amino acid sequence encoded by the DNA sequences disclosed herein and/or; (c) any DNA sequence that hybridizes to the complement of the coding sequences disclosed herein.
  • the term includes coding as well as noncoding regions, and preferably includes all sequences necessary for normal gene expression including promoters, enhancers and other regulatory sequences.
  • polynucleotide and “nucleic acid molecule” are used interchangeably to refer to polymeric forms of nucleotides of any length.
  • the polynucleotides may contain deoxyribonucleotides, ribonucleotides and/or their analogs. Nucleotides may have any three- dimensional structure, and may perform any function, known or unknown.
  • the term "polynucleotide” includes single-, double-stranded and triple helical molecules. "Oligonucleotide” refers to polynucleotides of between 5 and about 100 nucleotides of single- or double-stranded DNA. Oligonucleotides are also known as oligomers or oligos and may be isolated from genes, or chemically synthesized by methods known in the art.
  • a “primer” refers to an oligonucleotide, usually single-stranded, that provides a 3'-hydroxyl end for the initiation of enzyme-mediated nucleic acid synthesis.
  • the following are non-limiting embodiments of polynucleotides: a gene or gene fragment, exons, introns, mRNA, tRNA, rRNA, ribozymes, cDNA, recombinant polynucleotides, branched polynucleotides, plasmids, vectors, isolated DNA of any sequence, isolated RNA of any sequence, nucleic acid probes and primers.
  • a nucleic acid molecule may also comprise modified nucleic acid molecules, such as methylated nucleic acid molecules and nucleic acid molecule analogs.
  • Analogs of purines and pyrimidines are known in the art, and include, but are not limited to, aziridinycytosine, 4-acetylcytosine, 5- fluorouracil, 5-bromouracil, 5-carboxymethylaminomethyl-2-thiouracil, 5-carboxymethyl- aminomethyl uracil, inosine, N6-isopentenyladenine, 1-methyladenine, 1-methylpseudouracil, 1-methylguanine, 1-methylinosine, 2,2-dimethylguanine, 2-methyladenine, 2-methyl guanine, 3-methylcytosine, 5-methylcytosine, pseudouracil, 5-pentylnyluracil and 2,6-diaminopurine.
  • uracil as a substitute for thymine in a deoxyribon
  • a "fragment" of a polynucleotide is a polynucleotide comprised of at least 9 contiguous nucleotides, preferably at least 15 contiguous nucleotides and more preferably at least 45 nucleotides, of coding or non-coding sequences.
  • base pair also designated “bp,” refers to the complementary nucleic acid molecules.
  • the purine base adenine (A) is hydrogen bonded with the pyrimidine base thymine (T), and the purine base guanine (G) with the pyrimidine base cytosine (C).
  • Each hydrogen bonded base pair set is also known as a Watson-Crick base-pair.
  • a thousand base pairs is often called a kilobase pair, or kb.
  • a “base pair mismatch” refers to a location in a nucleic acid molecule in which the bases are not complementary Watson-Crick pairs.
  • nucleotide sequence which does not have one of the four bases at any position.
  • a sequence lacking one nucleotide i.e., lacking one type of base
  • gene targeting is a type of homologous recombination that occurs when a fragment of genomic DNA is introduced into a mammalian cell and that fragment locates and recombines with endogenous homologous sequences.
  • homologous recombination refers to the exchange of DNA fragments between two DNA molecules or chromatids at the site of homologous nucleotide sequences.
  • homologous denotes a characteristic of a DNA sequence having at least about 70 percent sequence identity as compared to a reference sequence, typically at least about 85 percent sequence identity, preferably at least about 95 percent sequence identity, and more preferably about 98 percent sequence identity, and most preferably about 100 percent sequence identity as compared to a reference sequence. Homology can be determined using a "BLASTN” algorithm. It is understood that homologous sequences can accommodate insertions, deletions and substitutions in the nucleotide sequence. Thus, linear sequences of nucleotides can be essentially identical even if some of the nucleotide residues do not precisely correspond or align.
  • the reference sequence may be a subset of a larger sequence, such as a portion of a gene or flanking sequence, or a repetitive portion of a chromosome.
  • target gene refers to any nucleic acid molecule or polynucleotide of any gene to be modified by homologous recombination.
  • the target sequence includes an intact gene, an exon or intron, a regulatory sequence or any region between genes.
  • the nucleic acid molecule having a sequence in the general population is not associated with any disease or discernible phenotype. It is noted that in the general population, wild-type genes may include multiple prevalent versions that contain alterations in sequence relative to each other and yet do not cause a discernible pathological effect.
  • the target gene comprises a portion of a particular gene or genetic locus in the individual's genomic DNA.
  • the target gene of the present invention consists of a retina-specific nuclear receptor gene, a lymphoid-specific GPCR gene, a melanocyte stimulating hormone receptor gene, a magnesium-dependent protein phosphatase gene, a chemokine receptor 1-like protein gene, an cGMP phosphodiesterase gene and a sulfotransferase gene, or a naturally occurring allelic variation or homologue thereof.
  • retina-specific nuclear receptor gene refers to a sequence comprising SEQ ID NO: 19 or the retina-specific nuclear receptor gene identified in Genebank as Accession No.: AF148129; Gl NO: 6651226.
  • the coding sequence of the retina-specific nuclear receptor gene comprises SEQ ID NO: 19 or the sequence identified in Genebank as Accession No.: AF148129; Gl NO: 6651226.
  • the term “lymphoid-specific GPCR gene” refers to a sequence comprising SEQ ID NO:22 or the lymphoid-specific GPCR gene in Genebank as Accession No.: L31580; Gl NO: 468340.
  • the coding sequence of the lymphoid-specific GPCR gene comprises SEQ ID NO:22 or the sequence identified in Genebank as Accession No.: L31580; GI NO: 468340.
  • the term "melanocyte stimulating hormone receptor gene” refers to a sequence comprising SEQ ED NO:25 or the melanocyte stimulating hormone receptor gene identified in Genebank as Accession No.: X65635; Gl NO: 53244.
  • the coding sequence of the melanocyte stimulating hormone receptor gene comprises SEQ ED NO:25 or the sequence identified in Genebank as Accession No.: X65635; Gl NO: 53244.
  • magnesium-dependent protein phosphatase gene refers to a sequence comprising SEQ ED NO:28 or the magnesium-dependent protein phosphatase gene identified in Genebank as Accession No.: D28117; Gl NO: 532678.
  • the coding sequence of the magnesium-dependent protein phosphatase gene comprises SEQ ED NO:28 or the sequence identified in Genebank as Accession No.: D281 17; Gl NO: 532678.
  • chemokine receptor 1-like protein gene refers to a sequence comprising SEQ ED NO:31 or the chemokine receptor 1-like protein gene identified in Genebank as Accession No.: U71089; Gl NO: 1589930.
  • the coding sequence of the chemokine receptor 1-like protein gene comprises SEQ ED NO:31 or the sequence identified in Genebank as Accession No.: U71089; Gl NO: 1589930.
  • the term an "cGMP phosphodiesterase gene” refers to a sequence comprising SEQ ID NO:34 or the cGMP phosphodiesterase gene identified in Genebank as Accession No.: X60664; Gl NO: 53587.
  • the coding sequence of the cGMP phosphodiesterase gene comprises SEQ ED NO: 34 or the sequence identified in Genebank as Accession No.: X60664; Gl NO: 53587.
  • the term a "sulfotransferase gene” refers to a sequence comprising
  • the coding sequence of the sulfotransferase gene comprises SEQ ED NO:37 or the sequence identified in Genebank as Accession No.:
  • Disruption of a target gene occurs when a fragment of genomic DNA locates and recombines with an endogenous homologous sequence. These sequence disruptions or modifications may include insertions, missense, frameshift, deletion, or substitutions, or replacements of DNA sequence, or any combination thereof. Insertions include the insertion of entire genes which may be of animal, plant, prokaryotic, or viral origin. Disruption, for example, can alter or replace a promoter, enhancer, or splice site of a target gene, and can alter the normal gene product by inhibiting its production partially or completely or by enhancing the normal gene product's activity.
  • transgenic cell refers to a cell containing within its genome a target gene that has been disrupted, modified, altered, or replaced completely or partially by the method of gene targeting.
  • transgenic animal is an animal that contains within its genome a specific gene that has been disrupted or inactivated completely or partially by the method of gene targeting.
  • the transgenic animal includes both the heterozygote animal (i.e., one defective allele and one wild-type allele) and the homozygous animal (i.e., two defective alleles).
  • the term "construct” refers to an artificially assembled DNA segment to be transferred into a target tissue, cell line or animal, including human. Typically, the construct will include the gene or a sequence of particular interest, a marker gene and appropriate control sequences.
  • the term "plasmid” refers to an autonomous, self-replicating extrachromosomal DNA molecule.
  • the plasmid construct of the present invention contains a positive selection marker positioned between two flanking regions of the gene of interest.
  • the construct can also contain a screening marker, for example, green fluorescent protein (GFP). If present, the screening marker is positioned outside of and some distance away from the flanking regions.
  • GFP green fluorescent protein
  • the terms "selectable marker” or “positive selection marker” refers to a gene encoding a product that enables only the cells that carry the gene to survive and/or grow under certain conditions. For example, plant and animal cells that express the introduced neomycin resistance (Neo 1 ) gene are resistant to the compound G418. Cells that do not carry the Neo r gene marker are killed by G418. Other positive selection markers will be known to those of skill in the art. "Positive-negative selection” refers to the process of selecting cells that carry a DNA insert integrated at a specific targeted location (positive selection) and also selecting against cells that cany a DNA insert integrated at a non-targeted chromosomal site (negative selection). Non-limiting examples of negative selection inserts include the gene encoding thymidine kinase (tk). Genes suitable for positive-negative selection are known in the art, see e.g., U.S. Patent 5,464,764.
  • Screening marker or “reporter gene” refers to a gene that encodes a product that can readily be assayed.
  • reporter genes can be used to determine whether a particular DNA construct has been successfully introduced into a cell, organ or tissue.
  • Non- limiting examples of screening markers include genes encoding for green fluorescent protein (GFP) or genes encoding for a modified fluorescent protein.
  • GFP green fluorescent protein
  • Negative screening marker is not to be construed as negative selection marker; a negative selection marker typically kills cells that express it.
  • vector refers to a DNA molecule that can carry inserted DNA and be perpetuated in a host cell.
  • Vectors are also known as cloning vectors, cloning vehicles or vehicles.
  • the term includes vectors that function primarily for insertion of a nucleic acid molecule into a cell, replication vectors that function primarily for the replication of nucleic acid, and expression vectors that function for transcription and/or translation of the DNA or RNA. Also included are vectors that provide more than one of the above functions.
  • a "host cell” includes an individual cell or cell culture which can be or has been a recipient for vector(s) or for incorporation of nucleic acid molecules and/or proteins.
  • Host cells include progeny of a single host cell, and the progeny may not necessarily be completely identical (in morphology or in total DNA complement) to the original parent due to natural, accidental, or deliberate mutation.
  • a host cell includes cells transfected with the constructs of the present invention.
  • the term "genomic library” refers to a collection of clones made from a set of randomly generated overlapping DNA fragments representing the genome of an organism.
  • a "cDNA library” is a collection of mRNA molecules present in a cell, tissue, or organism, turned into cDNA molecules with the enzyme reverse transcriptase, then inserted into vectors (other DNA molecules which can continue to replicate after addition of foreign DNA).
  • Exemplary vectors for libraries include bacteriophage (also known as "phage"), which are viruses that infect bacteria, for example lambda phage. The library can then be probed for the specific cDNA (and thus mRNA) of interest.
  • library systems which combine the high efficiency of a phage vector system with the convenience of a plasmid system (for example, ZAP system from Stratagene, La Jolla, CA) are used in the practice of the present invention.
  • exonuclease refers to an enzyme that cleaves nucleotides sequentially from the free ends of a linear nucleic acid substrate. Exonucleases can be specific for double or single-stranded nucleotides and/or directionally specific, for instance, 3 -5' and/or 5'-3'. Some exonucleases exhibit other enzymatic activities, for example, T4 DNA polymerase is both a polymerase and an active 3 -5' exonuclease.
  • exonucleases include exonuclease III which removes nucleotides one at a time from the 5 '-end of duplex DNA which does not have a phosphorylated 3 '-end, exonuclease VI which makes oligonucleotides by cleaving nucleotides off of both ends of single-stranded DNA, and exonuclease lambda which removes nucleotides from the 5' end of duplex DNA which have 5'-phosphate groups attached to them.
  • recombinase encompasses enzymes that induce, mediate or facilitate recombination, and other nucleic acid modifying enzymes that cause, mediate or facilitate the rearrangement of a nucleic acid sequence, or the excision or insertion of a first nucleic acid sequence from or into a second nucleic acid sequence.
  • the "target site" of a recombinase is the nucleic acid sequence or region that is recognized (e.g., specifically binds to) and/or acted upon (excised, cut or induced to recombine) by the recombinase.
  • zyme-directed site-specific recombination is intended to include the following events: deletion of a pre-selected DNA segment flanked by recombinase target sites; inversion of the nucleotide sequence of a pre-selected DNA segment flanked by recombinase target sites; and reciprocal exchange of DNA segments proximate to recombinase target sites located on different DNA molecules.
  • modulates refers to the inhibition, reduction or enhancement of a target gene's function, expression, or alternatively a phenotype associated with a disruption in a target gene.
  • ameliorates refers to a decreasing, reducing or eliminating a condition, disease, disorder, or phenotype, including an abnormality or symptom associated with a disruption in a target gene.
  • abnormality refers to any disease, disorder, condition, or a phenotype in which a disruption of a target gene is implicated, including pathological conditions.
  • Figure 1 is a schematic depicting one method of constructing a targeting vector of the present invention.
  • the plasmid PCR method is described in Examples 9 and 10.
  • Figure 2A is a schematic depicting the pDG2 vector.
  • the vector contains an ampicillin resistance gene and a neomycin (Neo 1 ) gene.
  • Neo 1 neomycin
  • On each side of the Neo r gene are two sites for ligation-independent cloning along with restriction sites.
  • the sequence of pDG2 is shown in Figure 2B and SEQ ED NO: l.
  • Figure 3A is schematic depicting the pDG4 vector.
  • the vector contains an ampicillin resistance gene, a neomycin (Neo 1 ) gene and a green fluorescent protein (GFP) gene.
  • GFP green fluorescent protein
  • On each side of the Neo r gene are two sites for ligation-independent cloning along with restriction enzyme recognition sites.
  • the sequence of pDG4 is shown in Figure 3B and SEQ E NO:2.
  • Figure 4 shows the nucleic acid sequence before and after T4 DNA polymerase treatment of annealing sites 1-4 contained on the ends of PCR-amplified genomic DNA.
  • Figure 5 shows the nucleic acid sequence before and after T4 DNA polymerase treatment of annealing site 1-4 contained within the pDG2 vector.
  • Figure 6 shows the arrangement of 5' and 3' flanking DNA relative to annealing sites 1, 2, 3 and 4 within the pDG2 vector during an annealing reaction.
  • Figure 7 shows the arrangement of 5' and 3' flanking DNA relative to annealing sites
  • Figure 8 shows the polynucleotide sequence identified as SEQ ED NO: 19.
  • Figure 8 also shows the sequences identified as SEQ ED NO:20 and SEQ ED NO:21, which were used in the retina-specific nuclear receptor gene targeting construct.
  • Figure 9 shows the polynucleotide sequence identified as SEQ ED NO:22.
  • Figure 9 also shows the sequences identified as SEQ ED NO:23 and SEQ ED NO:24, which were used in the lymphoid-specific GPCR gene targeting construct.
  • Figure 10 shows the polynucleotide sequence identified as SEQ ED NO:25.
  • Figure 10 also shows the sequences identified as SEQ ED NO:26 and SEQ ED NO:27 which were used in the melanocyte stimulating hormone receptor gene targeting construct.
  • Figure 11 shows the polynucleotide sequence identified as SEQ ED NO:28.
  • Figure 12 shows the polynucleotide sequence identified as SEQ ED NO:31.
  • Figure 13 shows the polynucleotide sequence identified as SEQ ED NO:34.
  • Figure 13B shows the sequences identified as SEQ ED NO:35 and SEQ ID NO:36 which were used in the cGMP phosphodiesterase gene targeting construct.
  • Figure 14 shows the polynucleotide sequence identified as SEQ ID NO:37.
  • Figure 14 also shows the sequences identified as SEQ ED NO:36 and SEQ ED NO:37 which were used in the sulfotransferase gene targeting construct.
  • the invention is based, in part, on the evaluation of the expression and role of genes and gene expression products.
  • the invention permits the definition of disease pathways and the identification of diagnostically and therapeutically useful targets.
  • genes which are mutated or down-regulated under disease conditions may be involved in causing or exacerbating the disease condition.
  • Treatments directed at up- regulating the activity of such genes or treatments which involve alternate pathways, may ameliorate the disease condition.
  • Any technique known in the art may be used to introduce a target gene transgene into animals to produce the founder lines of transgenic animals.
  • Such techniques include, but are not limited to pronuclear microinjection (U.S. Pat. No. 4,873,191); retrovirus mediated gene transfer into germ lines (Van der Putten, et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci., USA, 82:6148-6152 (1985)); gene targeting in embryonic stem cells (Thompson, et al., Cell, 56:313-321 (1989)); electroporation of embryos (Lo, Mol Cell.
  • the construct is generated in two steps by (1) amplifying (for example, using long-range PCR) sequences homologous to the target sequence, and (2) inserting another polynucleotide (for example a selectable marker) into the PCR product so that it is flanked by the homologous sequences.
  • the vector is a plasmid from a plasmid genomic library.
  • the completed construct is also typically a circular plasmid.
  • using long-range PCR with "outwardly pointing" oligonucleotides results in a vector into which a selectable marker can easily be inserted, preferably by ligation-independent cloning.
  • the construct can then be introduced into ES cells, where it can disrupt the function of the homologous target sequence.
  • stem cells may be myeloid, lymphoid, or neural progenitor and precursor cells.
  • transgenic cells may be particularly useful in the study of target gene function in individual developmental pathways.
  • Stem cells may be derived from any vertebrate species, such as mouse, rat, dog, cat, pig, rabbit, human, non-human primates and the like.
  • cells which are not totipotent it may be desirable to knock out both copies of the target using methods which are known in the art.
  • a positive selection marker e.g., Neor
  • screened for non-random integration can be further selected for multiple copies of the selectable marker gene by exposure to elevated levels of the selective agent (e.g., G418).
  • the cells are then analyzed for homozygosity at the target locus.
  • a second construct can be generated with a different positive selection marker inserted between the two homologous sequences.
  • the two constructs can be introduced into the cell either sequentially or simultaneously, followed by appropriate selection for each of the positive marker genes.
  • the final cell is screened for homologous recombination of both alleles of the target.
  • two separate fragments of a clone of interest are amplified and inserted into a vector containing a positive selection marker using ligation-independent cloning techniques.
  • the clone of interest is generally from a phage library and is identified and isolated using PCR techniques.
  • the ligation-independent cloning can be performed in two steps or in a single step.
  • constructs are used having multiple sites where 5 -3' single-stranded regions can be created.
  • constructs preferably plasmids, include a vector capable of directional, four-way ligation-independent cloning.
  • the constructs typically include a sequence encoding a positive selection marker such as a gene encoding neomycin resistance; a restriction enzyme site on either side of the positive selection marker and a sequence flanking the restriction enzyme sites which does not contain one of the four base pairs.
  • a positive selection marker such as a gene encoding neomycin resistance
  • a restriction enzyme site on either side of the positive selection marker and a sequence flanking the restriction enzyme sites which does not contain one of the four base pairs.
  • a construct suitable for introducing targeted mutations into ES cells is prepared directly from a plasmid genomic library. Using long-range PCR with specific primers, a sequence of interest is identified and isolated from the plasmid library in a single step. Following isolation of this sequence, a second polynucleotide that will disrupt the target sequence can be readily inserted between two regions encoding the sequence of interest. Using this direct method a targeted construct can be created in as little as 72 hours.
  • a targeted construct is prepared after identification of a clone of interest in a phage genomic library as described in detail below.
  • any gene can be quickly and efficiently prepared for use in ES cells.
  • constructs are prepared directly from a plasmid genomic library.
  • the library can be produced by any method known in the art.
  • DNA from mouse ES cells is isolated and treated with a restriction endonuclease which cleaves the DNA into fragments.
  • the DNA fragments are then inserted into a vector, for example a bacteriophage or phagemid (e.g., Lamda ZAPTM, Stratagene, La Jolla, CA) systems.
  • a vector for example a bacteriophage or phagemid (e.g., Lamda ZAPTM, Stratagene, La Jolla, CA) systems.
  • the DNA fragments are preferably between about 5 and about 20 kilobases.
  • the organism(s) from which the libraries are made will have no discernible disease or phenotypic effects.
  • the library is a mouse library.
  • This DNA may be obtained from any cell source or body fluid.
  • Non-limiting examples of cell sources available in clinical practice include ES cells, liver, kidney, blood cells, buccal cells, cerviovaginal cells, epithelial cells from urine, fetal cells, or any cells present in tissue obtained by biopsy.
  • Body fluids include urine, blood cerebrospinal fluid (CSF), and tissue exudates at the site of infection or inflammation. DNA extracted from the cells or body fluid using any method known in the art.
  • the DNA is extracted by adding 5 ml of lysis buffer (10 mM Tris-HCI pH 7.5), 10 mM EDTA (pH 8.0), 10 mM NaCI, 0.5% SDS and 1 mg/ml Proteinase K) to a confluent 100 mm plate of embryonic stem cells. The cells are then incubated at about 60°C for several hours or until fully lysed. Genomic DNA is purified from the lysed cells by several rounds of gentle phenolxhloroform extraction followed by an ethanol precipitation. For convenience, the genomic library can be arrayed into pools. In a preferred embodiment, a sequence of interest is identified from the plasmid library using oligonucleotide primers and long-range PCR.
  • the primers are outwardly-pointing primers which are designed based on sequence information obtained from a partial gene sequence, e.g., a cDNA or an EST sequence. As depicted for example in Figure 1, the product will be a linear fragment that excludes the region which is located between each primer.
  • PCR conditions found to be suitable are described below in the Examples. It will be understood that optimal PCR conditions can be readily determined by those skilled in the art. (See, e.g., PCR 2: A Practical Approach (1995) eds. M.J. McPherson, B.D. Hames and G.R. Taylor, ERL Press, Oxford; Yu, et al, Methods Mol. Bio., 58:335-9 (1996); Munroe, et al, Proc. Natl Acad. Sci., USA, 92:2209-13 (1995)). PCR screening of libraries eliminates many of the problems and time-delay associated with conventional hybridization screening in which the library must be plated, filters made, radioactive probes prepared and hybridization conditions established.
  • PCR screening requires only oligonucleotide primers to sequences (genes) of interest.
  • PCR products can be purified by a variety of methods, including but not limited to, microfiltration, dialysis, gel electrophoresis and the like. It may be desirable to remove the polymerase used in PCR so that no new DNA synthesis can occur.
  • thermostable DNA polymerases are commercially available, for example, VentTM DNA Polymerase (New England Biolabs), Deep VentTM DNA Polymerase (new England Biolabs), HotTubTM DNA Polymerase (Amersham), Thermo SequenaseTM (Amersham), rBstTM DNA Polymerase (Epicenter), PfuTM DNA Polymerase (Stratagene), Amplitaq GoldTM (Perkin Elmer), and ExpandTM (Boehringer-Mannheim).
  • VentTM DNA Polymerase New England Biolabs
  • Deep VentTM DNA Polymerase new England Biolabs
  • HotTubTM DNA Polymerase Amersham
  • Thermo SequenaseTM Amersham
  • rBstTM DNA Polymerase Epicenter
  • PfuTM DNA Polymerase Stratagene
  • Amplitaq GoldTM Perkin Elmer
  • ExpandTM Boehringer-Mannheim
  • the direct method involves joining the long-range PCR product (i.e., the vector) and one fragment (i.e., a gene encoding a selectable marker).
  • the vector contains two different sequence regions homologous to the target DNA sequence.
  • the vector also contains a sequence encoding a selectable marker, such as ampicillin.
  • the vector and fragment are designed so that, when treated to form single stranded ends, they will anneal such that the fragment is positioned between the two different regions of substantial homology to the target gene.
  • Ligation-independent cloning is a strategy for the directional cloning of polynucleotides without the use of kinases or ligases. (See, e.g.,
  • Single-stranded tails are created in LIC vectors, usually by treating the vector (at a digested restriction enzyme site) with T4 DNA polymerase in the presence of only one dNTP.
  • T4 DNA polymerase removes nucleotides until it encounters a residue conesponding to the single dNTP present in the reaction mix.
  • the vector is designed such that the single-stranded tails created are non- complementary.
  • the single-stranded tails of the four annealing sites are complementary to each other.
  • PCR products are created by building appropriate 5' extensions into oligonucleotide primers. The PCR product is purified to remove dNTPs (and original plasmid if it was used as template) and then treated with T4 DNA polymerase in the presence of the appropriate dNTP to generate the specific vector- compatible overhangs. Cloning occurs by annealing of the compatible tails.
  • Single-stranded tails are created at the ends of the clone fragments, for example using chemical or enzymatic means.
  • Complementary tails are created on the vector; however, to prevent annealing of the vector without insert, the vector tails are not complementary to each other.
  • the length of the tails is at least about 5 nucleotides, preferably at least about 12 nucleotides, even more preferably at least about 20 nucleotides.
  • placing the overlapping vector and fragment(s) in the same reaction is sufficient to anneal them.
  • the complementary sequences are combined, heated and allowed to slowly cool.
  • the heating step is between about 60°C and about 100°C, more preferably between about 60°C and 80°C, and even more preferably between 60°C and 70°C.
  • the heated reactions are then allowed to cool. Generally, cooling occurs rather slowly, for instance the reactions are generally at about room temperature after about an hour. The cooling must be sufficiently slow as to allow annealing.
  • the annealed fragment/vector can be used immediately, or stored frozen at -20°C until use. Further, annealing can be performed by adjusting the salt and temperature to achieve suitable conditions.
  • Hybridization reactions can be performed in solutions ranging from about 10 mM NaCI to about 600 mM NaCI, at temperatures ranging from about 37°C to about 65°C.
  • the stringency of the hybridization reaction is determined by both the salt concentration and the temperature.
  • a hybridization performed in 10 mM salt at 37°C may be of similar stringency to one performed in 500 mM salt at 65°C.
  • any hybridization conditions may be used that form hybrids between homologous complementary sequences.
  • a construct is made after using any of these annealing procedure where the vector portion contains the two different regions of substantial homology to the target gene (amplified from the plasmid library using long-range PCR) and the fragment is a gene encoding a selectable marker.
  • a clone of interest is identified in a pooled genomic library using PCR.
  • the PCR conditions are such that a gene encoding a selectable marker can be inserted directly into the positively identified clone.
  • the marker is positioned between two different sequences having substantial homology to the target DNA.
  • Genomic phage libraries can be prepared by any method known in the art.
  • a mouse embryonic stem cell library is prepared in lambda phage by cleaving genomic DNA into fragments of approximately 20 kilobases in length. The fragments are then inserted into any suitable lambda cloning vector, for example lambda Fix ⁇ or lambda Dash II (Stratagene, La Jolla, Ca)
  • pools may be created of plated libraries.
  • a genomic lambda phage library is plated at a density of approximately 1,000 clones (plaques) per plate.
  • Sufficient plates are created to represent the entire genome of the organism several times over. For example, approximately 1 million clones (1000 plates) will yield approximately 8 genome equivalents.
  • the plaques are then collected, for example by overlaying the plate with a buffer solution, incubating the plates and recollecting the buffer. The amount of buffer used will vary according to the plate size, generally one 100 mm diameter plate will be overlayed with approximately 4 ml of buffer and approximately 2 ml will be collected.
  • each plate lysate can be pooled at any time during this procedure and that they can be pooled in any combinations. For ease in later identification of single clones, however, it is preferable to keep each plate lysate separately and then make a pool. For example, each 2 ml lysate can be placed in a 96 well deep well plate. Pools can then be formed by taking an amount, preferably about 100 D l, from each well and combining them in the well of a new plate. Preferably, 100 D l of 12 individual plate lysates are combined in one well, forming a 1.2 ml pool representative of 12,000 clones of the library.
  • Each pool is then PCR-amplified using a set of PCR primers known to amplify the target gene.
  • the target gene can be a known full-length gene or, more preferably, a partial cDNA sequence obtained from publicly available nucleic acid sequence databases such as GenBank or EMBL. These databases include partial cDNA sequences known as expressed sequence tags (ESTs).
  • ESTs expressed sequence tags
  • the oligonucleotide PCR primers can be isolated from any organism by any method known in the art or, preferably, synthesized by chemical means.
  • flanking regions of the small known region of the target are generated.
  • the size of each flanking region is not critical and can range from as few as 100 base pairs to as many as 100 kb, preferably each flanking fragment is greater than about 1 kb in length, more preferably between about 1 and about 10 kb, and even more preferably between about 1 and about 5 kb.
  • larger fragments may increase the number of homologous recombination events in ES cells, larger fragments will also be more difficult to clone.
  • one of the oligonucleotide PCR primers used to amplify a flanking fragment is specific for the library cloning vector, for example lambda phage. Therefore, if the library is a lambda phage library, primers specific for the lambda phage arms can be used in conjunction with primers specific for the positive clone to generate long flanking fragments. Multiple PCR reactions can be set up to test different combinations of primers.
  • the primers used will generate flanking sequences between about 2 and about 6 kb in length.
  • the oligonucleotide primers are designed with 5' sequences complementary to the vector into which the fragments will be cloned.
  • primers are also designed so that the flanking fragments will be in the proper 3 '-5' orientation with respect to the vector and each other when the construct is assembled.
  • positive clones can be identified by visualization of a band on an electrophoretic gel.
  • the cloning involves a vector and two fragments.
  • the vector contains a positive selection marker, preferably Neo r , and cloning sites on each side of the positive selection marker for two different regions of the target gene.
  • the vector also contains a sequence coding for a screening marker (reporter gene), preferably, positioned opposite the positive selection marker.
  • the screening marker will be positioned outside the flanking regions of homologous sequences.
  • Figure 3A shows one embodiment of the vector with the screening marker, GFP, positioned on one side of the vector. However, the screening marker can be positioned anywhere between Not I and Site 4 on the side opposite the positive selection marker, Neo r .
  • a suitable vector is the plasmid vector shown in Figure 2 having the sequence of SEQ ED NO: l.
  • the specific nucleic acid ligation-independent cloning sites also referred to herein as annealing sites
  • sites 1, 2, 3 or 4" in Figure 1 are also shown herein.
  • the cloning sites are lacking at least one type of base, i.e., thymine (T), guanine (G), cytosine (C) or adenine (A).
  • T thymine
  • G guanine
  • C cytosine
  • A adenine
  • T4 DNA polymerase acts as both a 3 '-5' exonuclease and a polymerase.
  • T4 will act as an exonuclease.
  • Specific overhangs can therefore be created by reacting the pDG2 vector with T4 DNA polymerase in the presence of dTTP only.
  • Other enzymes useful in the practice of this invention will be known to those in the art, for instance uracil DNA glycosylase (UDG) (See, e.g., WO 93/18175).
  • UDG uracil DNA glycosylase
  • the vector exemplified herein has an overhand of 24 nucleotides.
  • a construct is assembled in a two-step cloning protocol.
  • each cloning region of homology is separately cloned into two of the annealing sites of the vector. For example, an "upstream” region of homology is cloned into annealing sites 1 and 2 while a separate cloning, a "downstream" region of homology is cloned into annealing sites 3 and 4.
  • a targeting construct containing both regions of homology can be created by digesting each clone with restriction enzymes where one enzyme digests outside of annealing site 1 (e.g., Not I in Figure 2A) and another enzyme digests between the positive selection marker and annealing site 3 (e.g., Sal I in Figure 2A).
  • the fragments containing the flanking homology regions from each construct will be purified (e.g., by gel electrophoresis) and combined using standard ligation techniques known in the art, to produce the resulting targeting construct.
  • a construct according to one aspect of the present invention can be formed in a single-step, four-way ligation procedure.
  • the vector and fragments are treated as described above. Briefly, the vector is treated to form two pieces, each piece having a single-stranded tail of specific sequence on each end. Likewise, the PCR-amplified flanking fragments are also treated to form single-stranded tails complementary to those of the vector pieces. The treated vector pieces and fragments are combined and allowed to anneal as described above. Because of the specificity of the single- stranded tails, the final construct will contain the fragments separated by the positive selection marker in the proper orientation.
  • the final plasmid constructs are amplified in bacteria, purified and can then be introduced into ES cells, or stored frozen at -20°C until use.
  • the vector is introduced into an embryonic stem cell line (e.g., by electroporation) and cells in which the introduced DNA has homologously recombined with the endogenous DNA are selected (see e.g., Li, et al., Cell, 69:91526 (1992)).
  • Successful recombination may be verified using various techniques known in the art, such as PCR and/or Southern analysis. Typically, several hundred individual colonies are selected following drug selection in G418 (for Neo cassettes), expanded for DNA preparation and screened for homologous recombination by PCR analysis.
  • the PCR screening procedure uses a target gene specific oligonucleotide that is not present on the targeting vector and an oligonucleotide corresponding to the Neo (or other selectable marker) cassette.
  • the selection of oligonucleotides outside the targeting vector is used to differentiate homologous recombinants from random integrations of the targeting vector.
  • four independent target gene specific oligonucleotides not present on the targeting vector are tested on wild type ES cell DNA in combination with target gene specific oligonucleotides that are adjacent to the insertion site of the Neo ( Figure 9). Oligonucleotides producing background bands or failing to give the predicted size product are eliminated.
  • a single target gene specific oligonucleotide is selected and paired with an oligonucleotide corresponding to the Neo cassette.
  • ES cells that are PCR positive in this screen are confirmed by a second PCR experiment that utilizes a different pair of target gene specific and Neo gene (or other selectable marker) specific oligonucleotides that are adjacent to, but distinct from, the original oligonucleotide pair.
  • this protocol may be repeated using oligonucleotides specific for target gene sequences located on the opposite side of the selectable marker in conjunction with a marker specific oligonucleotide. In this way proper integration of both homologous sequences of the targeting vector is verified.
  • Southern blot hybridization may also be used to confirm the ES cell targeting event using a probe that is not contained on the targeting vector but is adjacent to the predicted crossover site of homologous recombination. Southern blot experiments testing for homologous recombination should detect two distinct bands representing the wild type chromosome and mutant gene targeted allele.
  • High molecular weight genomic DNA is prepared from control ES cell parental lines and ES cell lines that are PCR positive for homologous recombination. The DNA is digested with a restriction enzyme (EcoRl) that has been demonstrated by restriction mapping to not cut the targeting vector within the arm of the target gene DNA homology and to be diagnostic of homologous recombination.
  • EcoRl restriction enzyme
  • EcoRl site is present in the Neo gene, a homologous recombination event should result in the insertion of the Neo cassette and the addition of the EcoRl site.
  • the addition of this site is predicted to result in an overall reduction in size of the band hybridizing to the probe.
  • the digested DNA is separated on a 1 % TAE Agarose gel, transferred to a nylon membrane, crosslinked with a UV light (StrataLinker) and hybridized with a 32-P labeled DNA probe. This probe does not hybridize to DNA sequences that are on the targeting vector but to a position that is adjacent to the site of homologous integration.
  • Selected cells are then injected into a blastocyst (or other stage of development suitable for the purposes of creating a viable animal, such as, for example, a morula) of an animal (e.g., a mouse) to form chimeras (see e.g., Bradley, A. in Teratocarcinomas and
  • Embryonic Stem Cells A Practical Approach, E. J. Robertson, ed., ERL, Oxford, pp. 113-152 (1987)).
  • selected ES cells can be allowed to aggregate with dissociated mouse embryo cells to form the aggregation chimera.
  • a chimeric embryo can then be implanted into a suitable pseudopregnant female foster animal and the embryo brought to term.
  • Chimeric progeny harbouring the homologously recombined DNA in their germ cells can be used to breed animals in which all cells of the animal contain the homologously recombined DNA.
  • chimeric progeny mice are used to generate a mouse with a heterozygous disruption in the target gene. Heterozygous knockout mice can then be mated. It is well know in the art that typically V ⁇ of the offspring of such matings will have a homozygous disruption in the target gene.
  • heterozygous and homozygous knockout mice can then be compared to normal, wild type mice to determine whether disruption of the target gene causes phenotypic changes, especially pathological changes.
  • heterozygous and homozygous mice may be evaluated for phenotypic changes by physical examination, necropsy, histology, clinical chemistry, complete blood count, body weight, organ weights, and cytological evaluation of bone marrow.
  • the phenotype (or phenotypic change) associated with a disruption in the target gene is placed into or stored in a database.
  • the database includes: (i) genotypic data (e.g., identification of the disrupted gene) and (ii) phenotypic data (e.g., phenotype(s) resulting from the gene disruption) associated with the genotypic data.
  • genotypic data e.g., identification of the disrupted gene
  • phenotypic data e.g., phenotype(s) resulting from the gene disruption
  • the database is preferably electronic.
  • the database is preferably combined with a search tool so that the database is searchable.
  • the present invention further contemplates conditional knockout animals, such as those produced using recombination methods.
  • Bacteriophage PI Cre recombinase and flp recombinase from yeast plasmids are two non-limiting examples of site-specific DNA recombinase enzymes which cleave DNA at specific target sites (lox P sites for cre recombinase and frt sites for flp recombinase) and catalyze a ligation of this DNA to a second cleaved site.
  • a large number of suitable alternative site-specific recombinases have been described, and their genes can be used in accordance with the method of the present invention.
  • Such recombinases include the Int recombinase of bacteriophage ⁇ (with or without Xis) (Weisberg, R. et. al., in Lambda II, (Hendrix, R., et al, Eds.), Cold Spring Harbor Press, Cold Spring Harbor, NY, pp. 211-50 (1983), herein incorporated by reference); Tpnl and the ⁇ -lactamase transposons (Mercier, et al, J. Bacteriol., 172:3745-57 (1990)); the Tn3 resolvase (Flanagan & Fennewald J. Molec. Biol, 206:295-304 (1989); Stark, et al,
  • Cre has been purified to homogeneity, and its reaction with the loxP site has been extensively characterized (Abremski & Hess J. Mol. Biol. 259: 1509- 14 (1984), herein incorporated by reference). Cre protein has a molecular weight of 35,000 and can be obtained commercially from New England Nuclear/Du Pont. The cre gene (which encodes the Cre protein) has been cloned and expressed (Abremski, et al. Cell 32: 1301-11 (1983), herein incorporated by reference). The Cre protein mediates recombination between two loxP sequences (Steinberg, et al. Cold Spring Harbor Symp. Quant. Biol.
  • a circular DNA molecule having two loxP sites in direct orientation will recombine to produce two smaller circles, whereas circular molecules having two loxP sites in an inverted orientation simply invert the DNA sequences flanked by the loxP sites.
  • recombinase action can result in reciprocal exchange of regions distal to the target site when targets are present on separate DNA molecules.
  • Recombinases have important application for characterizing gene function in knockout models.
  • insertion of a positive selection marker gene can affect the expression of nearby genes. These effects may make it difficult to determine gene function after a knockout event since one could not discern whether a given phenotype is associated with the inactivation of a gene, or the transcription of nearby genes. Both potential problems are solved by exploiting recombinase activity. When the positive selection marker is flanked by recombinase sites in the same orientation, the addition of the corresponding recombinase will result in the removal of the positive selection marker. In this way, effects caused by the positive selection marker or expression of fusion transcripts are avoided.
  • purified recombinase enzyme is provided to the cell by direct microinjection.
  • recombinase is expressed from a co-transfected construct or vector in which the recombinase gene is operably linked to a functional promoter.
  • An additional aspect of this embodiment is the use of tissue-specific or inducible recombinase constructs which allow the choice of when and where recombination occurs.
  • One method for practicing the inducible forms of recombinase-mediated recombination involves the use of vectors that use inducible or tissue-specific promoters or other gene regulatory elements to express the desired recombinase activity.
  • the inducible expression elements are preferably operatively positioned to allow the inducible control or activation of expression of the desired recombinase activity.
  • inducible promoters or other gene regulatory elements include, but are not limited to, tetracycline, metallothionine, ecdysone, and other steroid-responsive promoters, rapamycin responsive promoters, and the like (No, et al. Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 93:3346-51 (1996); Furth, et al. Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 91:9302-6 (1994)).
  • Additional control elements that can be used include promoters requiring specific transcription factors such as viral, promoters. Vectors incorporating such promoters would only express recombinase activity in cells that express the necessary transcription factors.
  • transgenic cells and knockout mice of the present invention may be produced by other methods known in the art.
  • the methods described in U.S. Patent No. 5,464,764; U.S. Patent No. 5,487,992; U.S. Patent No. 5,627,059; and U.S. Patent No. 5,631,153 may be used to produce a transgenic cell or knockout mice comprising a disruption in a target gene as provided by the present invention.
  • the cell- and animal-based systems described herein can be utilized as models for diseases.
  • Animals of any species including, but not limited to, mice, rats, rabbits, guinea pigs, pigs, micro-pigs, goats, and non-human primates, e.g., baboons, monkeys, and chimpanzees may be used to generate disease animal models.
  • cells from humans may be used.
  • These systems may be used in a variety of applications.
  • the cell- and animal-based model systems may be used to further characterize a target gene.
  • Such assays may be utilized as part of screening strategies designed to identify compounds which are capable of ameliorating disease symptoms.
  • the animal- and cell-based models may be used to identify drugs, pharmaceuticals, therapies and interventions which may be effective in treating disease.
  • Cell-based systems may be used to identify compounds which may act to ameliorate disease symptoms. For example, such cell systems may be exposed to a compound suspected of exhibiting an ability to ameliorate disease symptoms, at a sufficient concentration and for a time sufficient to elicit such an amelioration of disease symptoms in the exposed cells. After exposure, the cells are examined to determine whether one or more of the disease cellular phenotypes has been altered to resemble a more normal or more wild type, non-disease phenotype.
  • animal-based disease systems such as those described herein, may be used to identify compounds capable of ameliorating disease symptoms.
  • animal models may be used as test substrates for the identification of drugs, pharmaceuticals, therapies, and interventions which may be effective in treating a disease or other phenotypic characteristic of the animal.
  • animal models may be exposed to a compound or agent suspected of exhibiting an ability to ameliorate disease symptoms, at a sufficient concentration and for a time sufficient to elicit such an amelioration of disease symptoms in the exposed animals.
  • the response of the animals to the exposure may be monitored by assessing the reversal of disorders associated with the disease. Exposure may involve treating mother animals during gestation of the model animals described herein, thereby exposing embryos or fetuses to the compound or agent which may prevent or ameliorate the disease or phenotype. Neonatal, juvenile, and adult animals can also be exposed.
  • methods of identifying agents and/or compounds are provided, preferably, on the basis of the ability of the agents and/or compounds to affect physiological, histological or behavioral phenotypes associated with a disruption in a gene that encodes a target gene.
  • the present invention provides a method of identifying agents having the ability to modulate a target gene's expression or function.
  • the method includes administering an effective amount of the agent to the non-human transgenic animal of the present invention, preferably a mouse, having a disruption in a target gene.
  • the method includes measuring a response of the animal, for example, to the agent, and comparing the response of such animal to a control animal.
  • a "physiological response" is any biological or physical parameter of an animal which can be measured.
  • Molecular assays e.g., gene transcription, protein production and degradation rates
  • physical parameters e.g., exercise physiology tests, measurement of various parameters of respiration, measurement of heart rate or blood pressure, measurement of bleeding time, aPTT.T, or TT
  • cellular assays e.g,. immunohistochemical assays of cell surface markers, or the ability of cells to aggregate or proliferate
  • the animals and cells of the present invention may by utilized as models for diseases, disorders, or conditions associated with phenotypes relating to a disruption in a target gene.
  • the present invention also provides a unique animal model for testing and developing new treatments relating to the behavioral phenotypes. Analysis of the behavioral phenotype allows for the development of an animal model useful for testing, for instance, the efficacy of proposed genetic and pharmacological therapies for human genetic diseases, such as neurological, neuropsychological, or psychotic illnesses.
  • a statistical analysis of the various behaviors measured can be carried out using any conventional statistical program routinely used by those skilled in the art (such as, for example, "Analysis of Variance” or ANOVA).
  • a "p" value of about 0.05 or less is generally considered to be statistically significant, although slightly higher p values may still be indicative of statistically significant differences.
  • a comparison is made between the behavior of a transgenic animal (or a group thereof) to the behavior of a wild-type mouse (or a group thereof), typically under certain prescribed conditions.
  • “Abnormal behavior” as used herein refers to behavior exhibited by an animal having a disruption in the target gene, e.g. transgenic animal, which differs from an animal without a disruption in the target gene, e.g.
  • Abnormal behavior consists of any number of standard behaviors that can be objectively measured (or observed) and compared. In the case of comparison, it is preferred that the change be statistically significant to confirm that there is indeed a meaningful behavioral difference between the knockout animal and the wild-type control animal.
  • behaviors which may be measured or observed include, but are not limited to, ataxia, rapid limb movement, eye movement, breathing, motor activity, cognition, emotional behaviors, social behaviors, hyperactivity, hypersensitivity, anxiety, impaired learning, abnormal reward behavior, and abnormal social interaction, such as aggression
  • a series of tests may be used to measure the behavioral phenotype of the animal models of the present invention, including neurological and neuropsychological tests to identify abnormal behavior. These tests may be used to measure abnormal behavior relating to, for example, learning and memory, eating, pain, aggression, sexual reproduction, anxiety, depression, schizophrenia, and drug abuse. (See, e.g., Crawley and Paylor, Hormones and Behavior 31 : 197-211 (1997)).
  • the social interaction test involves exposing a mouse to other animals in a variety of settings. The social behaviors of the animals (e.g., touching, climbing, sniffing, and mating) are subsequently evaluated. Differences in behaviors can then be statistically analyzed and compared (See, e.g., S. E. File, et al, Pharmacol.
  • the mouse startle response test typically involves exposing the animal to a sensory stimulus
  • a pre-pulse inhibition test can also be used, in which the percent inhibition (from a normal startle response) is measured by "cueing" the animal first with a brief low-intensity pre-pulse prior to the startle pulse.
  • the electric shock test generally involves exposure to an electrified surface and measurement of subsequent behaviors such as, for example, motor activity, learning, social behaviors.
  • the behaviors are measured and statistically analyzed using standard statistical tests. (See, e.g., G. J. Kant, et al, Pharm. Bioch. Behav. 20:793-797 (1984); N. J. Leidenheimer, et al., Pharmacol Bioch. Behav. 30:351-355 (1988)).
  • the tail-pinch or immobilization test involves applying pressure to the tail of the animal and/or restraining the animal's movements.
  • Motor activity, social behavior, and cognitive behavior are examples of the areas that are measured.
  • the novelty test generally comprises exposure to a novel environment and/or novel objects.
  • the animal's motor behavior in the novel environment and/or around the novel object are measured and statistically analyzed.
  • This test may be used to detect visual processing deficiencies or defects.
  • the learned helplessness test involves exposure to stresses, for example, noxious stimuli, which cannot be affected by the animal's behavior.
  • the animal's behavior can be statistically analyzed using various standard statistical tests. (See, e.g., A. Leshner, et al., Behav. Neural Biol 26:497-501 ( 1979)).
  • a tail suspension test may be used, in which the "immobile" time of the mouse is measured when suspended "upside-down" by its tail. This is a measure of whether the animal struggles, an indicator of depression. In humans, depression is believed to result from feelings of a lack of control over one's life or situation.
  • the Morris water-maze test comprises learning spatial orientations in water and subsequently measuring the animal's behaviors, such as, for example, by counting the number of incorrect choices.
  • the behaviors measured are statistically analyzed using standard statistical tests.
  • a Y-shaped maze may be used (see, e.g., McFarland, D.J.,
  • the Y-maze is generally believed to be a test of cognitive ability.
  • the dimensions of each arm of the Y-maze can be, for example, approximately 40 cm x 8 cm x 20 cm, although other dimensions may be used.
  • Each arm can also have, for example, sixteen equally spaced photobeams to automatically detect movement within the arms. At least two different tests can be performed using such a Y-maze. In a continuous Y-maze paradigm, mice are allowed to explore all three arms of a Y-maze for, e.g., approximately 10 minutes.
  • the animals are continuously tracked using photobeam detection grids, and the data can be used to measure spontaneous alteration and positive bias behavior.
  • Spontaneous alteration refers to the natural tendency of a "normal" animal to visit the least familiar arm of a maze.
  • An alternation is scored when the animal makes two consecutive turns in the same direction, thus representing a sequence of visits to the least recently entered arm of the maze.
  • Position bias determines egocentrically defined responses by measuring the animal's tendency to favor turning in one direction over another. Therefore, the test can detect differences in an animal's ability to navigate on the basis of allocentric or egocentric mechanisms.
  • the two-trial Y-maze memory test measures response to novelty and spatial memory based on a free-choice exploration paradigm.
  • the animals are allowed to freely visit two arms of the Y-maze for, e.g., approximately 15 minutes.
  • the third arm is blocked off during this trial.
  • the second trial (retrieval) is performed after an intertrial interval of, e.g., approximately 2 hours.
  • the blocked arm is opened and the animal is allowed access to all three arms for, e.g., approximately 5 minutes.
  • Data are collected during the retrieval trial and analyzed for the number and duration of visits to each arm. Because the three arms of the maze are virtually identical, discrimination between novelty and familiarity is dependent on
  • the passive avoidance or shuttle box test generally involves exposure to two or more environments, one of which is noxious, providing a choice to be learned by the animal. Behavioral measures include, for example, response latency, number of correct responses, and consistency of response. (See, e.g., R. Ader, et al., Psychon. Sci. 26: 125- 128 (1972); R. R. Holson, Phys. Behav. 37:221-230 (1986)).
  • a zero-maze can be used.
  • the animals can, for example, be placed in a closed quadrant of an elevated annular platform having, e.g., 2 open and 2 closed quadrants, and are allowed to explore for approximately 5 minutes.
  • This paradigm exploits an approach-avoidance conflict between normal exploratory activity and an aversion to open spaces in rodents.
  • This test measures anxiety levels and can be used to evaluate the effectiveness of anti-anxiolytic drugs.
  • the time spent in open quadrants versus closed quadrants may be recorded automatically, with, for example, the placement of photobeams at each transition site.
  • the food avoidance test involves exposure to novel food and objectively measuring, for example, food intake and intake latency.
  • the behaviors measured are statistically analyzed using standard statistical tests.
  • the elevated plus-maze test comprises exposure to a maze, without sides, on a platform, the animal's behavior is objectively measured by counting the number of maze entries and maze learning.
  • the behavior is statistically analyzed using standard statistical tests. (See, e.g. , H. A. Baldwin, et al, Brain Res. Bull, 20:603-606 (1988)).
  • the stimulant-induced hyperactivity test involves injection of stimulant drugs (e.g., amphetamines, cocaine, PCP, and the like), and objectively measuring, for example, motor activity, social interactions, cognitive behavior.
  • stimulant drugs e.g., amphetamines, cocaine, PCP, and the like
  • the animal's behaviors are statistically analyzed using standard statistical tests.
  • the self-stimulation test generally comprises providing the mouse with the opportunity to regulate electrical and/or chemical stimuli to its own brain. Behavior is measured by frequency and pattern of self-stimulation. Such behaviors are statistically analyzed using standard statistical tests.
  • the reward test involves shaping a variety of behaviors, e.g., motor, cognitive, and social, measuring, for example, rapidity and reliability of behavioral change, and statistically analyzing the behaviors measured.
  • behaviors e.g., motor, cognitive, and social
  • the DRL (differential reinforcement to low rates of responding) performance test involves exposure to intermittent reward paradigms and measuring the number of proper responses, e.g., lever pressing. Such behavior is statistically analyzed using standard statistical tests.
  • standard statistical tests See, e.g., J. D. Sinden, et al., Behav. Neurosci. 100:320-329 (1986); V. Nalwa, et al., Behav Brain Res. 17:73-76 (1985); and A. J. Nonneman, et al., J. Comp. Physiol. Psych. 95:588-602 (1981)).
  • the spatial learning test involves exposure to a complex novel environment, measuring the rapidity and extent of spatial learning, and statistically analyzing the behaviors measured.
  • a complex novel environment measuring the rapidity and extent of spatial learning, and statistically analyzing the behaviors measured.
  • B. poucet et al., Brain Res. 37:269-280 (1990); D. Christie, et al., Brain Res. 37:263-268 (1990); and F. Van Haaren, et al., Behav. Neurosci. 102:481-488 (1988)
  • an open-field (of) test may be used, in which the greater distance traveled for a given amount of time is a measure of the activity level and anxiety of the animal.
  • the visual, somatosensory and auditory neglect tests generally comprise exposure to a sensory stimulus, objectively measuring, for example, orientating responses, and statistically analyzing the behaviors measured. (See, e.g., J. M. Vargo, et al., Exp. Neurol. 102: 199-209 (1988)).
  • the consummatory behavior test generally comprises feeding and drinking, and objectively measuring quantity of consumption.
  • the behavior measured is statistically analyzed using standard statistical tests. (See, e.g., P. J. Fletcher, et al., Psychopharmacol. 102:301-308 (1990); M. G. Corda, et al. affect Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. USA 80:2072-2076 (1983)).
  • a visual discrimination test can also be used to evaluate the visual processing of an animal.
  • One or two similar objects are placed in an open field and the animal is allowed to explore for about 5-10 minutes.
  • the time spent exploring each object proximity to, i.e., movement within, e.g., about 3-5 cm of the object is considered exploration of an object
  • the animal is then removed from the open field, and the objects are replaced by a similar object and a novel object.
  • the animal is returned to the open field and the percent time spent exploring the novel object over the old object is measured (again, over about a 5- 10 minute span). "Normal" animals will typically spend a higher percentage of time exploring the novel object rather than the old object.
  • the memory task becomes more hippocampal-dependent. If no delay is imposed, the task is more based on simple visual discrimination.
  • This test can also be used for olfactory discrimination, in which the objects (preferably, simple blocks) can be sprayed or otherwise treated to hold an odor. This test can also be used to determine if the animal can make gustatory discriminations; animals that return to the previously eaten food instead of novel food exhibit gustatory neophobia.
  • a hot plate analgesia test can be used to evaluate an animal's sensitivity to heat or painful stimuli. For example, a mouse can be placed on an approximately 55°C hot plate and the mouse's response latency (e.g., time to pick up and lick a hind paw) can be recorded. These responses are not reflexes, but rather "higher" responses requiring cortical involvement. This test may be used to evaluate a nociceptive disorder.
  • An accelerating rotarod test may be used to measure coordination and balance in mice.
  • Animals can be, for example, placed on a rod that acts like a rotating treadmill (or rolling log).
  • the rotarod can be made to rotate slowly at first and then progressively faster until it reaches a speed of, e.g., approximately 60 rpm.
  • the mice must continually reposition themselves in order to avoid falling off.
  • the animals are preferably tested in at least three trials, a minimum of 20 minutes apart. Those mice that are able to stay on the rod the longest are believed to have better coordination and balance.
  • a metrazol administration test can be used to screen animals for varying susceptibilities to seizures or similar events.
  • a 5mg/ml solution of metrazol can be infused through the tail vein of a mouse at a rate of, e.g., approximately 0.375 ml/min.
  • the infusion will cause all mice to experience seizures, followed by death.
  • Those mice that enter the seizure stage the soonest are believed to be more prone to seizures.
  • Four distinct physiological stages can be recorded: soon after the start of infusion, the mice will exhibit a noticeable "twitch", followed by a series of seizures, ending in a final tensing of the body known as "tonic extension", which is followed by death.
  • Target Gene Products may include proteins that represent functionally equivalent gene products.
  • Such an equivalent gene product may contain deletions, additions or substitutions of amino acid residues within the amino acid sequence encoded by the gene sequences described herein, but which result in a silent change, thus producing a functionally equivalent target gene product.
  • Amino acid substitutions may be made on the basis of similarity in polarity, charge, solubility, hydrophobicity, hydrophilicity, and/or the amphipathic nature of the residues involved.
  • nonpolar (hydrophobic) amino acids include alanine, leucine, isoleucine, valine, proline, phenylalanine, tryptophan, and methionine; polar neutral amino acids include glycine, serine, threonine, cysteine, tyrosine, asparagine, and glutamine; positively charged (basic) amino acids include arginine, lysine, and histidine; and negatively charged (acidic) amino acids include aspartic acid and glutamic acid.
  • “Functionally equivalent”, as utilized herein, refers to a protein capable of exhibiting a substantially similar in vivo activity as the endogenous gene products encoded by the target gene sequences.
  • “functionally equivalent” may refer to peptides capable of interacting with other cellular or extracellular molecules in a manner substantially similar to the way in which the corresponding portion of the endogenous gene product would.
  • Protein products useful according to the methods of the invention are peptides derived from or based on the target gene produced by recombinant or synthetic means (derived peptides).
  • Target gene products may be produced by recombinant DNA technology using techniques well known in the art.
  • methods for preparing the gene polypeptides and peptides of the invention by expressing nucleic acid encoding gene sequences are described herein. Methods which are well known to those skilled in the art can be used to construct expression vectors containing gene protein coding sequences and appropriate transcriptional/translational control signals. These methods include, for example, in vitro recombinant DNA techniques, synthetic techniques and in vivo recombination/genetic recombination (see, e.g., Sambrook, et al., 1989, supra, and Ausubel, et al., 1989, supra).
  • RNA capable of encoding gene protein sequences may be chemically synthesized using, for example, automated synthesizers (see, e.g. Oligonucleotide Synthesis: A Practical Approach, Gait, M. J. ed., IRL Press, Oxford (1984)).
  • host-expression vector systems may be utilized to express the gene coding sequences of the invention.
  • Such host-expression systems represent vehicles by which the coding sequences of interest may be produced and subsequently purified, but also represent cells which may, when transformed or transfected with the appropriate nucleotide coding sequences, exhibit the gene protein of the invention in situ.
  • These include but are not limited to microorganisms such as bacteria (e.g., E. coli, B. subtilis) transformed with recombinant bacteriophage DNA, plasmid DNA or cosmid DNA expression vectors containing gene protein coding sequences; yeast (e.g.
  • Saccharomyces, Pichia transformed with recombinant yeast expression vectors containing the gene protein coding sequences; insect cell systems infected with recombinant virus expression vectors (e.g., baculovirus) containing the gene protein coding sequences; plant cell systems infected with recombinant virus expression vectors (e.g., cauliflower mosaic virus, CaMV; tobacco mosaic virus, TMV) or transformed with recombinant plasmid expression vectors (e.g., Ti plasmid) containing gene protein coding sequences; or mammalian cell systems (e.g.
  • COS COS, CHO, BHK, 293, 3T3 harboring recombinant expression constructs containing promoters derived from the genome of mammalian cells (e.g., metallothionein promoter) or from mammalian viruses (e.g., the adenovirus late promoter; the vaccinia virus 7.5 K promoter).
  • promoters derived from the genome of mammalian cells (e.g., metallothionein promoter) or from mammalian viruses (e.g., the adenovirus late promoter; the vaccinia virus 7.5 K promoter).
  • a number of expression vectors may be advantageously selected depending upon the use intended for the gene protein being expressed. For example, when a large quantity of such a protein is to be produced, for the generation of antibodies or to screen peptide libraries, for example, vectors which direct the expression of high levels of fusion protein products that are readily purified may be desirable.
  • vectors include, but are not limited, to the E.
  • coli expression vector pUR278 (Ruther et al., EMBO J., 2: 1791-94 (1983)), in which the gene protein coding sequence may be ligated individually into the vector in frame with the lac Z coding region so that a fusion protein is produced; pIN vectors (Inouye & Inouye, Nucleic Acids Res., 13:3101-09 (1985); Van Heeke et al, J. Biol Chem., 264:5503-9 (1989)); and the like.
  • pGEX vectors may also be used to express foreign polypeptides as fusion proteins with glutathione S-transferase (GST).
  • Ln general, such fusion proteins are soluble and can easily be purified from lysed cells by adsorption to glutathione- agarose beads followed by elution in the presence of free glutathione.
  • the pGEX vectors are designed to include thrombin or factor Xa protease cleavage sites so that the cloned target gene protein can be released from the GST moiety.
  • full length cDNA sequences are appended with in-frame Bam HI sites at the amino terminus and Eco RI sites at the carboxyl terminus using standard PCR methodologies (Innis, et al. (eds) PCR Protocols: A Guide to Methods and Applications, Academic Press, San Diego (1990)) and ligated into the pGEX-2TK vector (Pharmacia, Uppsala, Sweden).
  • the resulting cDNA construct contains a kinase recognition site at the amino terminus for radioactive labeling and glutathione S-transferase sequences at the carboxyl terminus for affinity purification (Nilsson, et al., EMBO J., 4: 1075-80 (1985); Zabeau et al, EMBO J., 1 : 1217-24 (1982)).
  • AdNPV Autographa californica nuclear polyhedrosis virus
  • the virus grows in Spodoptera frugiperda cells.
  • the gene coding sequence may be cloned individually into non-essential regions (for example the polyhedrin gene) of the virus and placed under control of an AcNPV promoter (for example the polyhedrin promoter). Successful insertion of gene coding sequence will result in inactivation of the polyhedrin gene and production of non-occluded recombinant virus (i.e., virus lacking the proteinaceous coat coded for by the polyhedrin gene). These recombinant viruses are then used to infect Spodoptera frugiperda cells in which the inserted gene is expressed (see, e.g., Smith, et al, J. Virol. 46: 584-93 (1983); U.S. Pat. No. 4,745,051). In mammalian host cells, a number of viral-based expression systems may be utilized.
  • the gene coding sequence of interest may be ligated to an adenovirus transcription/translation control complex, e.g., the late promoter and tripartite leader sequence.
  • This chimeric gene may then be inserted in the adenovirus genome by in vitro or in vivo recombination. Insertion in a non-essential region of the viral genome (e.g., region El or E3) will result in a recombinant virus that is viable and capable of expressing gene protein in infected hosts, (e.g., see Logan et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 81:3655-59 (1984)).
  • Specific initiation signals may also be required for efficient translation of inserted gene coding sequences. These signals include the ATG initiation codon and adjacent sequences. In cases where an entire gene, including its own initiation codon and adjacent sequences, is inserted into the appropriate expression vector, no additional translational control signals may be needed. However, in cases where only a portion of the gene coding sequence is inserted, exogenous translational control signals, including, perhaps, the ATG initiation codon, must be provided. Furthermore, the initiation codon must be in phase with the reading frame of the desired coding sequence to ensure translation of the entire insert. These exogenous translational control signals and initiation codons can be of a variety of origins, both natural and synthetic.
  • the efficiency of expression may be enhanced by the inclusion of appropriate transcription enhancer elements, transcription terminators, etc. (see Bitter, et al, Methods in EnzymoL, 153:516-44 (1987)).
  • a host cell strain may be chosen which modulates the expression of the inserted sequences, or modifies and processes the gene product in the specific fashion desired. Such modifications (e.g., glycosylation) and processing (e.g., cleavage) of protein products may be important for the function of the protein.
  • Different host cells have characteristic and specific mechanisms for the post-translational processing and modification of proteins. Appropriate cell lines or host systems can be chosen to ensure the correct modification and processing of the foreign protein expressed.
  • eukaryotic host cells which possess the cellular machinery for proper processing of the primary transcript, glycosylation, and phosphorylation of the gene product may be used.
  • mammalian host cells include but are not limited to CHO, VERO, BHK, HeLa, COS, MDCK, 293, 3T3, WI38, etc.
  • cell lines which stably express the gene protein may be engineered.
  • host cells can be transformed with DNA controlled by appropriate expression control elements (e.g., promoter, enhancer, sequences, transcription terminators, polyadenylation sites, etc.), and a selectable marker.
  • appropriate expression control elements e.g., promoter, enhancer, sequences, transcription terminators, polyadenylation sites, etc.
  • engineered cells may be allowed to grow for 1-2 days in an enriched media, and then are switched to a selective media.
  • the selectable marker in the recombinant plasmid confers resistance to the selection and allows cells which stably integrate the plasmid into their chromosomes and grow, to form foci which in turn can be cloned and expanded into cell lines.
  • This method may advantageously be used to engineer cell lines which express the gene protein.
  • Such engineered cell lines may be particularly useful in screening and evaluation of compounds that affect the endogenous activity of the gene protein.
  • control of timing and/or quantity of expression of the recombinant protein can be controlled using an inducible expression construct.
  • inducible constructs and systems for inducible expression of recombinant proteins will be well known to those skilled in the art.
  • examples of such inducible promoters or other gene regulatory elements include, but are not limited to, tetracycline, metallothionine, ecdysone, and other steroid-responsive promoters, rapamycin responsive promoters, and the like (No, et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 93:3346-51 (1996); Furth, et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci.
  • Tet inducible gene expression system is utilized. (Gossen et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 89:5547-51 (1992); Gossen, et al, Science, 268:1766-69 (1995)). Tet Expression Systems are based on two regulatory elements derived from the tetracycline-resistance operon of the E.
  • TetR tetracycline repressor protein
  • tetO tetracycline operator sequence
  • expression of the recombinant protein is placed under the control of the tetO operator sequence and transfected or transformed into a host cell.
  • TetR which is co-transfected into the host cell
  • expression of the recombinant protein is repressed due to binding of the TetR protein to the tetO regulatory element.
  • Tc tetracycline
  • Dox doxycycline
  • the gene protein When used as a component in an assay system, the gene protein may be labeled, either directly or indirectly, to facilitate detection of a complex formed between the gene protein and a test substance.
  • labeling systems Any of a variety of suitable labeling systems may be used including but not limited to radioisotopes such as 1251; enzyme labeling systems that generate a detectable calo ⁇ metric signal or light when exposed to substrate; and fluorescent labels.
  • radioisotopes such as 1251
  • enzyme labeling systems that generate a detectable calo ⁇ metric signal or light when exposed to substrate
  • fluorescent labels Where recombinant DNA technology is used to produce the gene protein for such assay systems, it may be advantageous to engineer fusion proteins that can facilitate labeling, immobilization and/or detection.
  • Indirect labeling involves the use of a protein, such as a labeled antibody, which specifically binds to the gene product.
  • Such antibodies include but are not limited to polyclonal, monoclonal, chimeric, single chain, Fab
  • Such antibodies may include, but are not limited to polyclonal antibodies, monoclonal antibodies (mAbs), humanized or chimeric antibodies, single chain antibodies, Fab fragments, F(ab 2 fragments, fragments produced by a Fab expression library, anti-idiotypic (anti-Id) antibodies, and epitope-binding fragments of any of the above.
  • mAbs monoclonal antibodies
  • Such antibodies may be used, for example, in the detection of a target gene in a biological sample, or, alternatively, as a method for the inhibition of abnormal target gene activity.
  • such antibodies may be utilized as part of disease treatment methods, and/or may be used as part of diagnostic techniques whereby patients may be tested for abnormal levels of target gene proteins, or for the presence of abnormal forms of the such proteins.
  • various host animals may be immunized by injection with the target gene, its expression product or a portion thereof.
  • Such host animals may include but are not limited to rabbits, mice, and rats, to name but a few.
  • Various adjuvants may be used to increase the immunological response, depending on the host species, including but not limited to Freund's (complete and incomplete), mineral gels such as aluminum hydroxide, surface active substances such as lysolecithin, pluronic polyols, polyanions, peptides, oil emulsions, keyhole limpet hemocyanin, dinitrophenol, and potentially useful human adjuvants such as BCG (bacille Calmette-Guerin) and Corynebacterium parvum.
  • BCG Bacille Calmette-Guerin
  • Corynebacterium parvum bacille Calmette-Guerin
  • Polyclonal antibodies are heterogeneous populations of antibody molecules derived from the sera of animals immunized with an antigen, such as target gene product, or an antigenic functional derivative thereof.
  • an antigen such as target gene product, or an antigenic functional derivative thereof.
  • host animals such as those described above, may be immunized by injection with gene product supplemented with adjuvants as also described above.
  • Monoclonal antibodies which are homogeneous populations of antibodies to a particular antigen, may be obtained by any technique which provides for the production of antibody molecules by continuous cell lines in culture. These include, but are not limited to the hybridoma technique of Kohler and Milstein, Nature, 256:495-7 (1975); and U.S. Pat. No. 4,376,110), the human B-cell hybridoma technique (Kosbor, et al., Immunology Today, 4:72 (1983); Cote, et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 80:2026-30 (1983)), and the EBV- hybridoma technique (Cole, et al., in Monoclonal Antibodies And Cancer Therapy, Alan R.
  • Such antibodies may be of any immunoglobulin class including IgG, IgM, IgE, IgA, IgD and any subclass thereof.
  • the hybridoma producing the mAb of this invention may be cultivated in vitro or in vivo. Production of high titers of mAbs in vivo makes this the presently preferred method of production.
  • chimeric antibodies In addition, techniques developed for the production of "chimeric antibodies" (Morrison, et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci., 81 :6851-6855 (1984); Takeda, et al, Nature, 314:452-54 (1985)) by splicing the genes from a mouse antibody molecule of appropriate antigen specificity together with genes from a human antibody molecule of appropriate biological activity can be used.
  • a chimeric antibody is a molecule in which different portions are derived from different animal species, such as those having a variable region derived from a murine mAb and a human immunoglobulin constant region.
  • techniques described for the production of single chain antibodies U.S.
  • Antibody fragments which recognize specific epitopes may be generated by known techniques.
  • such fragments include but are not limited to: the F(ab')2 fragments which can be produced by pepsin digestion of the antibody molecule and the Fab fragments which can be generated by reducing the disulfide bridges of the F(ab)2 fragments.
  • Fab expression libraries may be constructed (Huse, et al., Science, 246: 1275- 81 (1989)) to allow rapid and easy identification of monoclonal Fab fragments with the desired specificity.
  • Cells that contain and express target gene sequences may be used to screen for therapeutic agents.
  • Such cells may include non-recombinant monocyte cell lines, such as U937 (ATCC# CRL- 1593), THP-1 (ATCC# TIB-202), and P388D1 (ATCC# TIB-63); endothelial cells such as HUVEC's and bovine aortic endothelial cells (BAEC's); as well as generic mammalian cell lines such as HeLa cells and COS cells, e.g., COS-7 (ATCC# CRL- 1651). Further, such cells may include recombinant, transgenic cell lines.
  • the knockout mice of the invention may be used to generate cell lines, containing one or more cell types involved in a disease, that can be used as cell culture models for that disorder. While cells, tissues, and primary cultures derived from the disease transgenic animals of the invention may be utilized, the generation of continuous cell lines is preferred. For examples of techniques which may be used to derive a continuous cell line from the transgenic animals, see Small, et al, Mol. Cell Biol, 5:642-48 (1985).
  • Target gene sequences may be introduced into, and overexpressed in, the genome of the cell of interest.
  • the coding portion of the target gene sequence may be ligated to a regulatory sequence which is capable of driving gene expression in the cell type of interest.
  • a regulatory sequence which is capable of driving gene expression in the cell type of interest.
  • Such regulatory regions will be well known to those of skill in the art, and may be utilized in the absence of undue experimentation.
  • Target gene sequences may also be disrupted or underexpressed. Cells having target gene disruptions or underexpressed target gene sequences may be used, for example, to screen for agents capable of affecting alternative pathways which compensate for any loss of function attributable to the disruption or underexpression.
  • In vitro systems may be designed to identify compounds capable of binding the target gene products.
  • Such compounds may include, but are not limited to, peptides made of D- and/or L-configuration amino acids (in, for example, the form of random peptide libraries; see e.g., Lam, et al., Nature, 354:82-4 (1991)), phosphopeptides (in, for example, the form of random or partially degenerate, directed phosphopeptide libraries; see, e.g., Songyang, et al., Cell, 72:767-78 (1993)), antibodies, and small organic or inorganic molecules.
  • Compounds identified may be useful, for example, in modulating the activity of target gene proteins, preferably mutant target gene proteins; elaborating the biological function of the target gene protein; or screening for compounds that disrupt normal target gene interactions or themselves disrupt such interactions.
  • the principle of the assays used to identify compounds that bind to the target gene protein involves preparing a reaction mixture of the target gene protein and the test compound under conditions and for a time sufficient to allow the two components to interact and bind, thus forming a complex which can be removed and/or detected in the reaction mixture.
  • These assays can be conducted in a variety of ways. For example, one method to conduct such an assay would involve anchoring the target gene protein or the test substance onto a solid phase and detecting target protein/test substance complexes anchored on the solid phase at the end of the reaction. In one embodiment of such a method, the target gene protein may be anchored onto a solid surface, and the test compound, which is not anchored, may be labeled, either directly or indirectly.
  • the anchored component may be immobilized by non-covalent or covalent attachments.
  • Non-covalent attachment may be accomplished simply by coating the solid surface with a solution of the protein and drying.
  • an immobilized antibody preferably a monoclonal antibody, specific for the protein may be used to anchor the protein to the solid surface.
  • the surfaces may be prepared in advance and stored.
  • the nonimmobilized component is added to the coated surface containing the anchored component. After the reaction is complete, unreacted components are removed (e.g., by washing) under conditions such that any complexes formed will remain immobilized on the solid surface.
  • the detection of complexes anchored on the solid surface can be accomplished in a number of ways.
  • the detection of label immobilized on the surface indicates that complexes were formed.
  • an indirect label can be used to detect complexes anchored on the surface; e.g., using a labeled antibody specific for the previously nonimmobilized component (the antibody, in turn, may be directly labeled or indirectly labeled with a labeled anti-Ig antibody).
  • a reaction can be conducted in a liquid phase, the reaction products separated from unreacted components, and complexes detected; e.g., using an immobilized antibody specific for target gene product or the test compound to anchor any complexes formed in solution, and a labeled antibody specific for the other component of the possible complex to detect anchored complexes.
  • Target gene product Compounds that are shown to bind to a particular target gene product through one of the methods described above can be further tested for their ability to elicit a biochemical response from the target gene protein.
  • Agonists, antagonists and/or inhibitors of the expression product can be identified utilizing assays well known in the art.
  • agents which may be used as therapeutics include the target gene, its expression product(s) and functional fragments thereof. Additionally, agents which reduce or inhibit mutant target gene activity may be used to ameliorate disease symptoms. Such agents include antisense, ribozyme, and triple helix molecules. Techniques for the production and use of such molecules are well known to those of skill in the art.
  • Anti-sense RNA and DNA molecules act to directly block the translation of mRNA by hybridizing to targeted mRNA and preventing protein translation.
  • antisense DNA oligodeoxyribonucleotides derived from the translation initiation site, e.g., between the -10 and +10 regions of the target gene nucleotide sequence of interest, are preferred.
  • Ribozymes are enzymatic RNA molecules capable of catalyzing the specific cleavage of RNA.
  • the mechanism of ribozyme action involves sequence-specific hybridization of the ribozyme molecule to complementary target RNA, followed by an endonucleolytic cleavage.
  • the composition of ribozyme molecules must include one or more sequences complementary to the target gene mRNA, and must include the well known catalytic sequence responsible for mRNA cleavage. For this sequence, see U.S. Pat. No. 5,093,246, which is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety.
  • engineered hammerhead motif ribozyme molecules that specifically and efficiently catalyze endonucleolytic cleavage of RNA sequences encoding target gene proteins.
  • ribozyme cleavage sites within any potential RNA target are initially identified by scanning the molecule of interest for ribozyme cleavage sites which include the following sequences, GUA, GUU and GUC. Once identified, short RNA sequences of between 15 and 20 ribonucleotides corresponding to the region of the target gene containing the cleavage site may be evaluated for predicted structural features, such as secondary structure, that may render the oligonucleotide sequence unsuitable. The suitability of candidate sequences may also be evaluated by testing their accessibility to hybridization with complementary oligonucleotides, using ribonuclease protection assays.
  • Nucleic acid molecules to be used in triple helix formation for the inhibition of transcription should be single stranded and composed of deoxyribonucleotides.
  • the base composition of these oligonucleotides must be designed to promote triple helix formation via Hoogsteen base pairing rules, which generally require sizeable stretches of either purines or pyrimidines to be present on one strand of a duplex.
  • Nucleotide sequences may be pyrimidine-based, which will result in TAT and CGC triplets across the three associated strands of the resulting triple helix.
  • the pyrimidine-rich molecules provide base complementarity to a purine-rich region of a single strand of the duplex in a parallel orientation to that strand.
  • nucleic acid molecules may be chosen that are purine- rich, for example, containing a stretch of G residues. These molecules will form a triple helix with a DNA duplex that is rich in GC pairs, in which the majority of the purine residues are located on a single strand of the targeted duplex, resulting in GGC triplets across the three strands in the triplex.
  • the potential sequences that can be targeted for triple helix formation may be increased by creating a so called “switchback" nucleic acid molecule.
  • Switchback molecules are synthesized in an alternating 5 -3', 3'-5' manner, such that they base pair with first one strand of a duplex and then the other, eliminating the necessity for a sizeable stretch of either purines or pyrimidines to be present on one strand of a duplex. It is possible that the antisense, ribozyme, and/or triple helix molecules described herein may reduce or inhibit the transcription (triple helix) and/or translation (antisense, ribozyme) of mRNA produced by both normal and mutant target gene alleles.
  • nucleic acid molecules that encode and express target gene polypeptides exhibiting normal activity may be introduced into cells that do not contain sequences susceptible to whatever antisense, ribozyme, or triple helix treatments are being utilized.
  • Anti-sense RNA and DNA, ribozyme, and triple helix molecules of the invention may be prepared by any method known in the art for the synthesis of DNA and RNA molecules. These include techniques for chemically synthesizing oligodeoxyribonucleotides and oligoribonucleotides well known in the art such as for example solid phase phosphoramidite chemical synthesis.
  • RNA molecules may be generated by in vitro and in vivo transcription of DNA sequences encoding the antisense RNA molecule. Such DNA sequences may be incorporated into a wide variety of vectors which incorporate suitable RNA polymerase promoters such as the T7 or SP6 polymerase promoters.
  • antisense cDNA constructs that synthesize antisense RNA constitutively or inducibly, depending on the promoter used, can be introduced stably into cell lines.
  • DNA molecules may be introduced as a means of increasing intracellular stability and half-life. Possible modifications include but are not limited to the addition of flanking sequences of ribonucleotides or deoxyribonucleotides to the 5' and/or 3' ends of the molecule or the use of phosphorothioate or 2' O-methyl rather than phosphodiesterase linkages within the oligodeoxyribonucleotide backbone.
  • Antibodies that are both specific for target gene protein, and in particular, mutant gene protein, and interfere with its activity may be used to inhibit mutant target gene function. Such antibodies may be generated against the proteins themselves or against peptides corresponding to portions of the proteins using standard techniques known in the art and as also described herein. Such antibodies include but are not limited to polyclonal, monoclonal, Fab fragments, single chain antibodies, chimeric antibodies, etc.
  • lipofectin liposomes may be used to deliver the antibody or a fragment of the Fab region which binds to the target gene epitope into cells. Where fragments of the antibody are used, the smallest inhibitory fragment which binds to the target or expanded target protein's binding domain is preferred.
  • peptides having an amino acid sequence corresponding to the domain of the variable region of the antibody that binds to the target gene protein may be used. Such peptides may be synthesized chemically or produced via recombinant DNA technology using methods well known in the art (see, e.g., Creighton, Proteins: Structures and Molecular Principles (1984) W.H.
  • single chain neutralizing antibodies which bind to intracellular target gene epitopes may also be administered.
  • Such single chain antibodies may be administered, for example, by expressing nucleotide sequences encoding single-chain antibodies within the target cell population by utilizing, for example, techniques such as those described in Marasco, et al., Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. USA, 90:7889-93 (1993).
  • RNA sequences encoding target gene protein may be directly administered to a patient exhibiting disease symptoms, at a concentration sufficient to produce a level of target gene protein such that disease symptoms are ameliorated. Patients may be treated by gene replacement therapy.
  • One or more copies of a normal target gene, or a portion of the gene that directs the production of a normal target gene protein with target gene function may be inserted into cells using vectors which include, but are not limited to adenovirus, adeno- associated virus, and retrovirus vectors, in addition to other particles that introduce DNA into cells, such as liposomes. Additionally, techniques such as those described above may be utilized for the introduction of normal target gene sequences into human cells.
  • Cells preferably, autologous cells, containing normal target gene expressing gene sequences may then be introduced or reintroduced into the patient at positions which allow for the amelioration of disease symptoms.
  • the identified compounds that inhibit target mutant gene expression, synthesis and/or activity can be administered to a patient at therapeutically effective doses to treat or ameliorate the disease.
  • a therapeutically effective dose refers to that amount of the compound sufficient to result in amelioration of symptoms of the disease.
  • Toxicity and therapeutic efficacy of such compounds can be determined by standard pharmaceutical procedures in cell cultures or experimental animals, e.g., for determining the LD 50 (the dose lethal to 50% of the population) and the ED 50 (the dose therapeutically effective in 50% of the population).
  • the dose ratio between toxic and therapeutic effects is the therapeutic index and it can be expressed as the ratio LD 50 /ED 50 .
  • Compounds which exhibit large therapeutic indices are preferred.
  • While compounds that exhibit toxic side effects may be used, care should be taken to design a delivery system that targets such compounds to the site of affected tissue in order to minimize potential damage to uninfected cells and, thereby, reduce side effects.
  • the data obtained from the cell culture assays and animal studies can be used in formulating a range of dosage for use in humans.
  • the dosage of such compounds lies preferably within a range of circulating concentrations that include the ED 50 with little or no toxicity.
  • the dosage may vary within this range depending upon the dosage form employed and the route of administration utilized.
  • the therapeutically effective dose can be estimated initially from cell culture assays.
  • a dose may be formulated in animal models to achieve a circulating plasma concentration range that includes the IC 50 (i.e., the concentration of the test compound which achieves a half-maximal inhibition of symptoms) as determined in cell culture. Such information can be used to more accurately determine useful doses in humans. Levels in plasma may be measured, for example, by high performance liquid chromatography.
  • compositions for use in accordance with the present invention may be formulated in conventional manner using one or more physiologically acceptable carriers or excipients.
  • the compounds and their physiologically acceptable salts and solvates may be formulated for administration by inhalation or insufflation (either through the mouth or the nose) or oral, buccal, parenteral, topical, subcutaneous, intraperitoneal, intraveneous, intrapleural, intraoccular, intraarterial, or rectal administration. It is also contemplated that pharmaceutical compositions may be administered with other products that potentiate the activity of the compound and optionally, may include other therapeutic ingredients.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions may take the form of, for example, tablets or capsules prepared by conventional means with pharmaceutically acceptable excipients such as binding agents (e.g., pregelatinised maize starch, polyvinylpynolidone or hydroxypropyl methylcellulose); fillers (e.g., lactose, microcrystalline cellulose or calcium hydrogen phosphate); lubricants (e.g., magnesium stearate, talc or silica); disintegrants (e.g., potato starch or sodium starch glycolate); or wetting agents (e.g., sodium lauryl sulphate).
  • binding agents e.g., pregelatinised maize starch, polyvinylpynolidone or hydroxypropyl methylcellulose
  • fillers e.g., lactose, microcrystalline cellulose or calcium hydrogen phosphate
  • lubricants e.g., magnesium stearate, talc or silica
  • disintegrants e.g., potato
  • Liquid preparations for oral administration may take the form of, for example, solutions, syrups or suspensions, or they may be presented as a dry product for constitution with water or other suitable vehicle before use.
  • Such liquid preparations may be prepared by conventional means with pharmaceutically acceptable additives such as suspending agents (e.g., sorbitol syrup, cellulose derivatives or hydrogenated edible fats); emulsifying agents (e.g., lecithin or acacia); non-aqueous vehicles (e.g., almond oil, oily esters, ethyl alcohol or fractionated vegetable oils); and preservatives (e.g., methyl or propyl- p-hydroxybenzoates or sorbic acid).
  • the preparations may also contain buffer salts, flavoring, coloring and sweetening agents as appropriate.
  • Preparations for oral administration may be suitably formulated to give controlled release of the active compound.
  • compositions may take the form of tablets or lozenges formulated in conventional manner.
  • the compounds for use according to the present invention are conveniently delivered in the form of an aerosol spray presentation from pressurized packs or a nebuliser, with the use of a suitable propellant, e.g., dichlorodifluoromethane, trichlorofluoromethane, dichlorotetrafluoroethane, carbon dioxide or other suitable gas.
  • a suitable propellant e.g., dichlorodifluoromethane, trichlorofluoromethane, dichlorotetrafluoroethane, carbon dioxide or other suitable gas.
  • a suitable propellant e.g., dichlorodifluoromethane, trichlorofluoromethane, dichlorotetrafluoroethane, carbon dioxide or other suitable gas.
  • a suitable propellant e.g., dichlorodifluoromethane, trichlorofluo
  • the compounds may be formulated for parenteral administration by injection, e.g., by bolus injection or continuous infusion.
  • Formulations for injection may be presented in unit dosage form, e.g., in ampoules or in multi-dose containers, with an added preservative.
  • the compositions may take such forms as suspensions, solutions or emulsions in oily or aqueous vehicles, and may contain formulatory agents such as suspending, stabilizing and/or dispersing agents.
  • the active ingredient may be in powder form for constitution with a suitable vehicle, e.g., sterile pyrogen-free water, before use.
  • the compounds may also be formulated in rectal compositions such as suppositories or retention enemas, e.g., containing conventional suppository bases such as cocoa butter or other glycerides.
  • Oral ingestion is possibly the easiest method of taking any medication.
  • Such a route of administration is generally simple and straightforward and is frequently the least inconvenient or unpleasant route of administration from the patient's point of view.
  • this involves passing the material through the stomach, which is a hostile environment for many materials, including proteins and other biologically active compositions.
  • compositions may also include various buffers (e.g., Tris, acetate, phosphate), solubilizers (e.g., Tween, Polysorbate), carriers such as human serum albumin, preservatives (thimerosol, benzyl alcohol) and anti-oxidants such as ascorbic acid in order to stabilize pharmaceutical activity.
  • the stabilizing agent may be a detergent, such as tween-20, tween-80, NP-40 or Triton X-100.
  • EBP may also be incorporated into paniculate preparations of polymeric compounds for controlled delivery to a patient over an extended period of time. A more extensive survey of components in pharmaceutical compositions is found in Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 18th ed., A. R. Gennaro, ed., Mack Publishing, Easton, Pa. (1990).
  • the compounds may also be formulated as a depot preparation. Such long acting formulations may be administered by implantation (for example subcutaneously or intramuscularly) or by intramuscular injection.
  • the compounds may be formulated with suitable polymeric or hydrophobic materials (for example as an emulsion in an acceptable oil) or ion exchange resins, or as sparingly soluble derivatives, for example, as a sparingly soluble salt.
  • suitable polymeric or hydrophobic materials for example as an emulsion in an acceptable oil
  • ion exchange resins for example as sparingly soluble derivatives, for example, as a sparingly soluble salt.
  • the compositions may, if desired, be presented in a pack or dispenser device which may contain one or more unit dosage forms containing the active ingredient.
  • the pack may for example comprise metal or plastic foil, such as a blister pack.
  • the pack or dispenser device may be accompanied by instructions for administration.
  • reagents may be used, for example, for the detection of the presence of target gene mutations, or the detection of either over or under expression of target gene mRNA.
  • alteration of the wild-type target gene locus is detected.
  • the method can be performed by detecting the wild-type target gene locus and confirming the lack of a predisposition or neoplasia.
  • “Alteration of a wild-type gene” encompasses all forms of mutations including deletions, insertions and point mutations in the coding and noncoding regions. Deletions may be of the entire gene or only a portion of the gene.
  • Point mutations may result in stop codons, frameshift mutations or amino acid substitutions.
  • Somatic mutations are those which occur only in certain tissues, e.g., in the tumor tissue, and are not inherited in the germline.
  • Germline mutations can be found in any of a body's tissues and are inherited. If only a single allele is somatically mutated, an early neoplastic state is indicated. However, if both alleles are mutated, then a late neoplastic state may be indicated. The finding of gene mutations thus provides both diagnostic and prognostic information.
  • a target gene allele which is not deleted can be screened for other mutations, such as insertions, small deletions, and point mutations. Mutations found in tumor tissues may be linked to decreased expression of the target gene product. However, mutations leading to non-functional gene products may also be linked to a cancerous state. Point mutational events may occur in regulatory regions, such as in the promoter of the gene, leading to loss or diminution of expression of the mRNA. Point mutations may also abolish proper RNA processing, leading to loss of expression of the target gene product, or a decrease in mRNA stability or translation efficiency.
  • One test available for detecting mutations in a candidate locus is to directly compare genomic target sequences from cancer patients with those from a control population.
  • Mutations from cancer patients falling outside the coding region of the target gene can be detected by examining the non-coding regions, such as introns and regulatory sequences near or within the target gene.
  • An early indication that mutations in noncoding regions are important may come from Northern blot experiments that reveal messenger RNA molecules of abnormal size or abundance in cancer patients as compared to control individuals.
  • the methods described herein may be performed, for example, by utilizing prepackaged diagnostic kits comprising at least one specific gene nucleic acid or anti-gene antibody reagent described herein, which may be conveniently used, e.g., in clinical settings, to diagnose patients exhibiting disease symptoms or at risk for developing disease.
  • Any cell type or tissue preferably monocytes, endothelial cells, or smooth muscle cells, in which the gene is expressed may be utilized in the diagnostics described below.
  • DNA or RNA from the cell type or tissue to be analyzed may easily be isolated using procedures which are well known to those in the art. Diagnostic procedures may also be performed in situ directly upon tissue sections (fixed and/or frozen) of patient tissue obtained from biopsies or resections, such that no nucleic acid purification is necessary. Nucleic acid reagents may be used as probes and/or primers for such in situ procedures (see, for example, Nuovo, PCR In Situ Hybridization: Protocols and Applications, Raven Press, N.Y. (1992)).
  • Gene nucleotide sequences may, for example, be used in hybridization or amplification assays of biological samples to detect disease-related gene structures and expression.
  • assays may include, but are not limited to, Southern or Northern analyses, restriction fragment length polymorphism assays, single stranded conformational polymorphism analyses, in situ hybridization assays, and polymerase chain reaction analyses.
  • analyses may reveal both quantitative aspects of the expression pattern of the gene, and qualitative aspects of the gene expression and/or gene composition. That is, such aspects may include, for example, point mutations, insertions, deletions, chromosomal rearrangements, and/or activation or inactivation of gene expression.
  • Preferred diagnostic methods for the detection of gene-specific nucleic acid molecules may involve for example, contacting and incubating nucleic acids, derived from the cell type or tissue being analyzed, with one or more labeled nucleic acid reagents under conditions favorable for the specific annealing of these reagents to their complementary sequences within the nucleic acid molecule of interest.
  • the lengths of these nucleic acid reagents are at least 9 to 30 nucleotides.
  • all non-annealed nucleic acids are removed from the nucleic acid:fingerprint molecule hybrid. The presence of nucleic acids from the fingerprint tissue which have hybridized, if any such molecules exist, is then detected.
  • the nucleic acid from the tissue or cell type of interest may be immobilized, for example, to a solid support such as a membrane, or a plastic surface such as that on a microtitre plate or polystyrene beads.
  • a solid support such as a membrane, or a plastic surface such as that on a microtitre plate or polystyrene beads.
  • Detection of the remaining, annealed, labeled nucleic acid reagents is accomplished using standard techniques well- known to those in the art.
  • Alternative diagnostic methods for the detection of gene-specific nucleic acid molecules may involve their amplification, e.g., by PCR (the experimental embodiment set forth in Mullis U.S. Pat. No. 4,683,202 (1987)), ligase chain reaction (Barany, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 88: 189-93 (1991)), self sustained sequence replication (Guatelli, et al., Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. USA, 87: 1874-78 (1990)), transcriptional amplification system (Kwoh, et al, Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. USA.
  • a cDNA molecule is obtained from an RNA molecule of interest (e.g., by reverse transcription of the RNA molecule into cDNA).
  • Cell types or tissues from which such RNA may be isolated include any tissue in which wild type fingerprint gene is known to be expressed, including, but not limited, to monocytes, endothelium, and/or smooth muscle.
  • a sequence within the cDNA is then used as the template for a nucleic acid amplification reaction, such as a PCR amplification reaction, or the like.
  • the nucleic acid reagents used as synthesis initiation reagents (e.g., primers) in the reverse transcription and nucleic acid amplification steps of this method may be chosen from among the gene nucleic acid reagents described herein.
  • the preferred lengths of such nucleic acid reagents are at least 15-30 nucleotides.
  • the nucleic acid amplification may be performed using radioactively or non-radioactively labeled nucleotides. Alternatively, enough amplified product may be made such that the product may be visualized by standard ethidium bromide staining or by utilizing any other suitable nucleic acid staining method.
  • Antibodies directed against wild type or mutant gene peptides may also be used as disease diagnostics and prognostics. Such diagnostic methods, may be used to detect abnormalities in the level of gene protein expression, or abnormalities in the structure and/or tissue, cellular, or subcellular location of fingerprint gene protein. Structural differences may include, for example, differences in the size, electronegativity, or antigenicity of the mutant fingerprint gene protein relative to the normal fingerprint gene protein.
  • Protein from the tissue or cell type to be analyzed may easily be detected or isolated using techniques which are well known to those of skill in the art, including but not limited to western blot analysis.
  • western blot analysis For a detailed explanation of methods for carrying out western blot analysis, see Sambrook, et al (1989) supra, at Chapter 18.
  • the protein detection and isolation methods employed herein may also be such as those described in Harlow and Lane, for example, (Antibodies: A Laboratory Manual, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, Cold Spring Harbor, New York (1988)).
  • Preferred diagnostic methods for the detection of wild type or mutant gene peptide molecules may involve, for example, immunoassays wherein fingerprint gene peptides are detected by their interaction with an anti-fingerprint gene-specific peptide antibody.
  • antibodies, or fragments of antibodies useful in the present invention may be used to quantitatively or qualitatively detect the presence of wild type or mutant gene peptides. This can be accomplished, for example, by immunofluorescence techniques employing a fluorescently labeled antibody (see below) coupled with light microscopic, flow cytometric, or fluorimetric detection. Such techniques are especially preferred if the fingerprint gene peptides are expressed on the cell surface.
  • the antibodies (or fragments thereof) useful in the present invention may, additionally, be employed histologically, as in immunofluorescence or immunoelectron microscopy, for in situ detection of fingerprint gene peptides.
  • In situ detection may be accomplished by removing a histological specimen from a patient, and applying thereto a labeled antibody of the present invention.
  • the antibody (or fragment) is preferably applied by overlaying the labeled antibody (or fragment) onto a biological sample.
  • Immunoassays for wild type, mutant, or expanded fingerprint gene peptides typically comprise incubating a biological sample, such as a biological fluid, a tissue extract, freshly harvested cells, or cells which have been incubated in tissue culture, in the presence of a detectably labeled antibody capable of identifying fingerprint gene peptides, and detecting the bound antibody by any of a number of techniques well known in the art.
  • a biological sample such as a biological fluid, a tissue extract, freshly harvested cells, or cells which have been incubated in tissue culture
  • the biological sample may be brought in contact with and immobilized onto a solid phase support or carrier such as nitrocellulose, or other solid support which is capable of immobilizing cells, cell particles or soluble proteins.
  • a solid phase support or carrier such as nitrocellulose, or other solid support which is capable of immobilizing cells, cell particles or soluble proteins.
  • the support may then be washed with suitable buffers followed by treatment with the detectably labeled gene-specific antibody.
  • the solid phase support may then be washed with the buffer a second time to remove unbound antibody.
  • the amount of bound label on solid support may then be detected by conventional means.
  • solid phase support or carrier any support capable of binding an antigen or an antibody.
  • supports or carriers include glass, polystyrene, polypropylene, polyethylene, dextran, nylon, amylases, natural and modified celluloses, polyacrylamides, gabbros, and magnetite.
  • the nature of the carrier can be either soluble to some extent or insoluble for the purposes of the present invention.
  • the support material may have virtually any possible structural configuration so long as the coupled molecule is capable of binding to an antigen or antibody.
  • the support configuration may be spherical, as in a bead, or cylindrical, as in the inside surface of a test tube, or the external surface of a rod.
  • the surface may be flat such as a sheet, test strip, etc.
  • Preferred supports include polystyrene beads. Those skilled in the art will know many other suitable carriers for binding antibody or antigen, or will be able to ascertain the same by use of routine experimentation.
  • binding activity of a given lot of anti-wild type or -mutant fingerprint gene peptide antibody may be determined according to well known methods. Those skilled in the art will be able to determine operative and optimal assay conditions for each determination by employing routine experimentation.
  • EIA enzyme immunoassay
  • the enzyme which is bound to the antibody will react with an appropriate substrate, preferably a chromogenic substrate, in such a manner as to produce a chemical moiety which can be detected, for example, by spectrophotometric, fluorimetric or by visual means.
  • Enzymes which can be used to detectably label the antibody include, but are not limited to, malate dehydrogenase, staphylococcal nuclease, delta-5-steroid isomerase, yeast alcohol dehydrogenase, alpha-glycerophosphate, dehydrogenase, triose phosphate isomerase, horseradish peroxidase, alkaline phosphatase, asparaginase, glucose oxidase, beta- galactosidase, ribonuclease, urease, catalase, glucose-6-phosphate dehydrogenase, glucoamylase and acetylcholinesterase.
  • the detection can be accomplished by colorimetric methods which employ a chromogenic substrate for the enzyme. Detection may also be accomplished by visual comparison of the extent of enzymatic reaction of a substrate in comparison with similarly prepared standards.
  • Detection may also be accomplished using any of a variety of other immunoassays.
  • a radioimmunoassay RIA
  • RIA radioimmunoassay
  • the radioactive isotope can be detected by such means as the use of a gamma counter or a scintillation counter or by autoradiography. It is also possible to label the antibody with a fluorescent compound. When the fluorescently labeled antibody is exposed to light of the proper wave length, its presence can then be detected due to fluorescence.
  • fluorescent labeling compounds are fluorescein isothiocyanate, rhodamine, phycoerythrin, phycocyanin, allophycocyanin, o-phthaldehyde and fluorescamine.
  • the antibody can also be detectably labeled using fluorescence emitting metals such as 152Eu, or others of the lanthanide series. These metals can be attached to the antibody using such metal chelating groups as diethylenetriaminepentacetic acid (DTPA) or ethylenediamine-tetraacetic acid (EDTA).
  • DTPA diethylenetriaminepentacetic acid
  • EDTA ethylenediamine-tetraacetic acid
  • the antibody also can be detectably labeled by coupling it to a chemiluminescent compound.
  • the presence of the chemiluminescent-tagged antibody is then determined by detecting the presence of luminescence that arises during the course of a chemical reaction.
  • chemiluminescent labeling compounds are luminol, isoluminol, theromatic acridinium ester, imidazole, acridinium salt and oxalate ester.
  • a bioluminescent compound may be used to label the antibody of the present invention. Bioluminescence is a type of chemiluminescence found in biological systems in, which a catalytic protein increases the efficiency of the chemiluminescent reaction. The presence of a bioluminescent protein is determined by detecting the presence of luminescence.
  • Important bioluminescent compounds for purposes of labeling are luciferin, luciferase and aequorin.
  • Genomic libraries using the lambda ZAPTM system were prepared as follows. Embryonic stem cells were grown in 100 mm tissue culture plates. High molecular weight genomic DNA was isolated from these ES cells by adding 5 ml of lysis buffer (10 mM Tris- HCL pH7.5, 10 mM EDTA pH 8.0, 10 mM NaCI, 0.5% SDS, and 1 mg/ml Proteinase K) to a confluent 100 mm plate of embryonic stem cells. The cells were then incubated at 60°C for several hours or until fully lysed. Genomic DNA was purified from the lysed cells by several rounds of gentle phenol : chloroform extractions followed by ethanol precipitation.
  • lysis buffer 10 mM Tris- HCL pH7.5, 10 mM EDTA pH 8.0, 10 mM NaCI, 0.5% SDS, and 1 mg/ml Proteinase K
  • the genomic DNA was partially digested with the restriction enzyme Sau 3A I to generate fragments of approximately 5-20 kb.
  • the ends of these fragments were partially filled in by addition of dATP and dGTP in the present of Klenow DNA polymerase, creating incompatible ends on the genomic fragments. Size fragments of between 5 and 10 kb were then purified by agarose gel electrophoresis (lx TAE, 0.8% gel).
  • the DNA was then isolated from the excised agarose pieces using a QIAquick gel extraction kit (Qiagen, Inc., Valencia, CA).
  • the genomic fragments were ligated into the Lambda ZapTM II vector (Stratagene, Inc., La Jolla, CA) that had been cut with Xho I and partially filled in using dTTP, dCTP, and Klenow DNA polymerase. After ligation, the DNA was packaged using a lambda packaging mix (Gigapack Ul gold, Stratagene, Inc., La Jolla, CA) and the titer was determined. Circular phagemid DNA was derived from the lambda library by growing the lambda clones on the appropriate bacterial strain (XL-1 Blue MRF , Stratagene, Inc.) in the presence of the Ml 3 helper phage, ExAssist (Stratagene, Inc.).
  • the pools of phagemid DNA described above were screened for specific genes of interest using long-range PCR and "outward pointing" oligos, chosen as described above based on the known sequence (depicted in Figure 1).
  • the PCR reactions contains 2 ⁇ l of a pool phagemid DNA sample, 3 ⁇ l of lOx PCR Buffer 3 (Boehringer Mannheim), 1.1 ⁇ l 10 mM dNTPs, 50 nM primers, 0.3 ⁇ l of EXPAND Long Template PCR Enzyme Mix
  • the products of the PCR reactions were separated by electrophoresis through agarose gels containing IX TAE buffer and visualized with ethidium bromide and UV light. Any large fragments indicative of successful long-range PCR were excised from the gel and purified using QIAquick PCR purification kit (Qiagen).
  • the long-range PCR fragment of interest was "purified” using a QIAquick PCR purification kit (Qiagen, Inc., Santa Clarita, California). Single-stranded ends of the PCR fragments were generated by mixing: 0.1-2 ⁇ g of the fragment; 2 ⁇ l of NEB (New England BioLabs) Buffer 4; 1 ⁇ l of 2 mM dTTP, 6 units of T4 DNA polymerase (NEB), H 2 0 to total volume of 20 ⁇ l and incubating at 25°C for 30 minutes. The polymerase was inactivated by heating at 75°C for 20 minutes.
  • Single-stranded ends were also created on the Neo r selectable marker fragment by digesting the plasmid vector pDG2 at the unique restriction sites, with Sac I and Sac II (pDG2 depicted in Figure 2A) and treating each reaction with T4 DNA polymerase as above.
  • the vector shown in Figure 1 was prepared with single-stranded ends complementary to those on the long-range PCR fragment.
  • the vector and fragments were then assembled into constructs using either a two-step cloning strategy or a four-way, single-step protocol. Briefly, a reaction containing 10 ng of T4-treated Neo r cassette, 1 ⁇ l of T4-treated PCR fragment, 0.2 ⁇ l of 0.5 M EDTA, 0.3 ⁇ l of 0.5 M NaCI and H 2 0 up to 4 ⁇ l was heated to 65°C and allowed to cool to room temperature over approximately 45 minutes. The mixture was then transformed into subcloning efficiency DH5- ⁇ competent cells.
  • a mouse embryonic stem cell library was prepared in lambda phage as follows. Genomic libraries were constructed from genomic DNA by partial cleavage of DNA at Sau 3AI sites to yield genomic fragments of approximately 20 kb in length. The terminal sequences of these DNA fragments were partially filled in using Klenow enzyme in the presence of dGTP and dATP and the fragments were ' ligated using T4 DNA ligase into Xho I sites of an appropriate lambda cloning vector, e.g., lambda Fix II (Stratagene, Inc., La Jolla, California), which had been partially filled in using Klenow in the presence of dTTP and dCTP.
  • an appropriate lambda cloning vector e.g., lambda Fix II (Stratagene, Inc., La Jolla, California), which had been partially filled in using Klenow in the presence of dTTP and dCTP.
  • the partially digested genomic DNA was size selected using a sucrose gradient and sequences of approximately 20 kb selected for.
  • the enriched fraction was cloned into a Bam HI cut lambda vector, e.g., lambda Datsh II (Stratagene, Inc., La Jolla, California). .
  • the library was plated onto 1,152 plates, each plate containing approximately 1,000 clones. Thus, a total of 1.1 million clones (the equivalent of 8 genomes) was plated.
  • the phage were eluted from each plate by adding 4 ml of lambda elution buffer (10 mM MgCl 2 , 10 mM Tris-pH 8.0) to each plate and incubating for 3 to 5 hours at room temperature. After incubation, 2 ml of buffer was collected from each plate and placed into one well of a 96 deep well plate (Costar, In.). Twelve 96-well plates were filled and referred to as the "sub-pool library.”
  • pool libraries were made by placing 100 ⁇ l of 12 different sub-pool wells into one well of a new 96 well plate. The 12 sub-pool plates were combined to form 1 plate of pool libraries.
  • PCR was performed in the presence of 0.5 units of Amplitaq GoldTM (Perkin Elmer), 1 ⁇ M of each oligonucleotide, 200 ⁇ M dNTPs, 2 ⁇ l of a 1 to 5 dilution of the pool (or subpool) supernatant, 50 mM KCl, 100 mM Tris-HCI (pH 8.3), and either 1.5 mM or 1.25 mM MgCl 2 . Cycling conditions were 95°C for 8 minutes (1 cycle); 95°C for 30 seconds, 60°C for 30 seconds, 72°C for 45 seconds (55 cycles); 72°C for 7 minutes (1 cycle) and holding at 4°C.
  • Amplitaq GoldTM Perkin Elmer
  • flanking fragments As described above, knock-out constructs contain two blocks of DNA sequence homologous to the target gene, flanking a positive selection marker. Long-range PCR was performed from the pools of lambda clones positively identified as described above in Example 2. Each fragment was generated using a pair of oligonucleotides with predetermined sequences lacking one type of base and complementary to predetermined sequences on the vector. The fragments obtained were between 1 and 5 kb. A third fragment, longer than 5 kb, is also generated using appropriate oligonucleotides. This third fragment was then used to obtain DNA sequences near the gene to be knocked out but outside of the vector.
  • the pDG2 plasmid vector ( Figure 2A) contains unique restriction sites Sac II and Sac I. Appropriate single-stranded annealing sites were generated by digesting the pDG2 vector with either restriction enzyme Sac II or Sac I and treating each reaction with T4 DNA polymerase and dTTP as described above. Four reactions were set up in microtitre plates for each vector, the reaction containing 1 ⁇ l of either (1) T4 DNA polymerase-treated fragments; (2) a 1: 10 dilution of the T4-treated fragments reaction; (3) a 1 : 100 dilution of the T4-treated fragments or (4) H 2 0 (no insert control). The microtitre plates were sealed, placed in- between two temperature blocks heated to 65°C, and allowed to cool slowly at room temperature for 30 to 45 minutes.
  • microtitre plate was then placed on ice and 20-25 ⁇ l of subcloning efficiency competent cells added to each well. The plate was incubated on ice for 20-30 minutes. The microtitre plate was then placed between two temperature blocks heated to 42°C for 2 minutes, followed by 2 minutes on ice. 100 ⁇ l of LB was added to each well, the plate covered with parafilm and incubated 30-60 minutes at 37°C. The entire contents of each well were plated on one LB-Amp plate and incubated at 37°C overnight.
  • the plasmid DNA was digested with Not I and Sal I enzymes. As shown in Figure 2A, a Not I/Sal I digestion will generate a large fragment containing cloning sites 3 and 4 and a smaller fragment containing cloning sites 1 and 2 and the Neo r gene. After digestion, the reactions were run on a 0.8% agarose gel containing 0.2 ⁇ g/ml ethidium bromide. For no inserts, two bands were present, one of 1975 base pairs and one of 2793 base pairs. When an insert fragment was present, at least one of these bands would be larger because it would also contain a fragment (insert 1 or 2) either at the annealing site 1/2 or the site 3/4.
  • the insert bands were excised and treated with a QIAquick gel extraction kit.
  • a second ligation reaction was performed containing 1 ⁇ l of 10X ligase buffer (50 mM Tris-HCI pH 7.5, 10 mM MgCl 2 , 10 mM dithiothreitol, 1 mM ATP, 25 ⁇ g/ml bovine serum albumin), 1 ⁇ l T4 DNA ligase, 1-2 ⁇ l fragment (site 3/4 band), 5 ⁇ l of site 1/2 band and H 2 0 up to 10 ⁇ l. Controls were also set up replacing either the site 3/4 fragment or the site 1/2 fragment with water. The reactions were incubated 1 to 2 hours at room temperature and transformed with
  • Rl genomic library refers to a genomic library prepared from the Rl ES cell line. Such libraries can be prepared such as described in Example 1.
  • transgenic mice comprising disruptions in retina-specific nuclear receptor genes were created. More particularly, a retina-specific targeting construct having the ability to disrupt or modify retina-specific nuclear receptor genes, specifically comprising SEQ ED NO: 19 was created using the oligonucleotide sequences identified herein as SEQ ED NO:20 or SEQ ED NO:21.
  • the targeting construct was introduced into ES cells derived from the 129/Sv-+P+Mgf-SLJ/J mouse substrain to generate chimeric mice.
  • FI mice were generated by breeding with C57BL/6 females.
  • F2 homozygous mutant mice were produced by intercrossing FI heterozygous males and females.
  • the transgenic animals comprising disruptions in retina- specific nuclear receptor genes were analyzed for phenotypic changes and expression patterns.
  • the phenotypes associated with a disruption in a retina-specific nuclear receptor gene were determined as follows: Homozygous Mice:
  • mice analyzed demonstrated at least one of the following phenotypes:
  • Eyes Eye abnormalities, including severe retinal dysplasia characterized by extensive rosette formation and retinal folding; segmental thinning of the outer nuclear layer of the retina with rods and cones filling the foci; and complete unilateral absence of the retina. Moreover, the space normally occupied by the retina was filled with fibrous connective tissue, spicules of osteoid and some mineral. In areas, connective tissue was adherent to the posterior lens capsule. Posterior synechia with a thickened iris adherent to the anterior aspect of the lens was detected. The pigmented epithelial layer of the retina was thickened and its cells were increased in size and number. The internal structure of the lens was disorganized and comprised swollen and degenerated fibers. In instances where the retina was absent unilaterally, small focal remnants were present.
  • Gastrointestinal tract Abnormalities in the gastrointestinal tract included multifocal infiltrates of neutrophils in the deep mucosa and submucosa in the stomach. Skin. Abnormalities in the skin included focal lymphocytic inflammation within the dermis.
  • ALT alanine aminotransferase
  • AST aspartate aminotransferase
  • CK creatinine kinase
  • ALP Alkaline phosphatase
  • lymphoid-specific G-protein coupled receptors disruptions in lymphoid-specific G-protein coupled receptor genes were produced by homologous recombination. Specifically, transgenic mice comprising disruptions in lymphoid-specific G- protein coupled receptor genes were created. More particularly, a lymphoid-specific GPCR targeting construct having the ability to disrupt or modify lymphoid-specific G-protein coupled receptor genes, specifically comprising SEQ ID NO:22 was created using the oligonucleotide sequences identified herein as SEQ ID NO:23 and SEQ ID NO:24. The targeting construct was inserted into ES cells derived from the 129/OlaHsd mouse substrain to generate chimeric mice.
  • FI mice were generated by breeding with C57BL/6 females. F2 homozygous mutant mice were produced by intercrossing FI heterozygous males and females.
  • the transgenic animals comprising disruptions in lymphoid-specific G-protein coupled receptor genes were analyzed for phenotypic changes and expression patterns.
  • the phenotypes associated with a disruption in a lymphoid-specific GPCR were determined as follows:
  • the homozygous mice demonstrated at least one of the following phenotypes: Lung. Abnormalities in the lung included cellular infiltrates around bronchioles. Pulmonary changes, exhibiting varying degrees of patchy peribronchial lymphocytic cellular infiltrates were detected. The infiltrates were primarily composed of small lymphocytes. Peribronchial lymphocytic cuffing included focal subpleural collections of lymphocytes; fibrinoid necrosis in vessel walls; and hyperplasia of bronchial epithelium.
  • pancreas Abnormalities in the pancreas included pancreatic cellular infiltrates near ducts and islets. Specifically, periductular cellular infiltrates or peri-islet cellular infiltrates were present, and were primarily composed of small lymphocytes.
  • LacZ beta-galactosidase
  • lymph nodes Specifically, in the lymph nodes, several cells showed strong X-Gal staining. In the spleen, strong staining was detected in some cells in the red pulp.
  • Example 6 Generation and Analysis of Mice Comprising Melanocyte Stimulating Hormone Receptor Gene Disruptions To investigate the role of GPCR melanocyte stimulating hormones, disruptions in
  • GPCR melanocyte stimulating hormone genes were produced by homologous recombination. Specifically, transgenic mice comprising disruptions in GPCR melanocyte stimulating hormone genes were created. More particularly, a melanocyte stimulating hormone targeting construct having the ability to disrupt or modify genes encoding melanoyte stimulating hormone receptors, specifically comprising SEQ ID NO:25 was created using the oligonucleotide sequences identified herein as SEQ ID NO:26 and SEQ ED NO:27. The targeting construct was inserted into ES cells derived from the 129/OlaHsd mouse substrain to generate chimeric mice. FI mice were generated by breeding with C57BL/6 females. F2 homozygous mutant mice were produced by intercrossing FI heterozygous males and females.
  • the transgenic animals comprising disruptions in melanocyte stimulating hormone receptor genes were analyzed for phenotypic changes and expression patterns.
  • the phenotypes associated with a disruption in a melanocyte stimulating hormone receptor gene were determined as follows:
  • the homozygous mice were significantly different from wild- type mice in the total distance traveled in the open field test.
  • the homozygous mice were hypoactive, in that they moved about and explored the open field significantly than their wild-type counterparts.
  • the open field test has been used to demonstrate the changes in activity level and anxiety.
  • the open field data demonstrates that the homozygous mice were hypoactive than the wild-type control mice.
  • LacZ (beta-gal actosidase) expression was detected in the esophagus, skin, and in the male reproductive system.
  • disruptions in magnesium-dependent protein phosphatase genes were produced by homologous recombination.
  • transgenic mice comprising disruptions in magnesium-dependent protein phosphatase genes were created.
  • a magnesium-dependent protein phosphatase gene targeting construct having the ability to disrupt and mutate magnesium-dependent protein phosphatase genes, specifically genes comprising SEQ ED NO:28, was created using the oligonucleotide sequences identified herein as SEQ ED NO:29 and SEQ ED NO:30.
  • the targeting construct was inserted into ES cells derived from the 129/OlaHsd mouse substrain to generate chimeric mice.
  • FI mice were generated by breeding with C57BL/6 females.
  • F2 homozygous mutant mice were produced by intercrossing FI heterozygous males and females.
  • the transgenic animals comprising disruptions in magnesium-dependent protein phosphatase genes were analyzed for phenotypic changes and expression patterns.
  • the phenotypes associated with a disruption in magnesium-dependent protein genes were determined as follows:
  • the homozygous mice demonstrated at least one of the following phenotypes: Lung.
  • Abnormalities in the lung included pulmonary lesions suggestive of foreign body aspiration pneumonia. Patchy, peribronchial, acute inflammation with associated granulomata (probably foreign body), foamy alveolar macrophages, and eosinophilic crystals within alveolar macrophages were found in the lungs. Patchy yellow-red discoloration of the lungs was also detected.
  • Abnormalities in the blood included elevated white blood cell (WBC) count.
  • WBC white blood cell
  • Necropsy Examination Patchy, red-yellow lung discoloration. Muscles and bones were softer than wild-type controls.
  • Expression Analysis Strong lacZ expression was detectable in all tissue or organs examined, including the brain, spinal cord, sciatic nerve, eyes, harderian glands, thymus, spleen, lymph nodes, bone marrow, aorta, heart, lung, liver, gallbladder, pancreas, kidney, urinary bladder, trachea, larynx, esophagus, thyroid gland, pituitary gland, adrenal gland, salivary gland, tongue, skeletal muscle, skin, and female and male reproductive systems.
  • chemokine receptor 1-like protein genes were produced by homologous recombination. Specifically, transgenic mice comprising disruptions in chemokine receptor 1-like genes were created. More particularly, a chemokine receptor 1-like gene targeting construct having the ability to disrupt and mutate chemokine receptor 1-like genes, specifically comprising SEQ ID NO:31 , was created using the oligonucleotide sequences identified herein as SEQ ED NO:32 and SEQ ID NO:33. The targeting construct was inserted into ES cells derived from the 129/OlaHsd mouse substrain to generate chimeric mice. FI mice were generated by breeding with C57BL/6 females. F2 homozygous mutant mice were produced by intercrossing FI heterozygous males and females.
  • disruptions in cGMP phosphodiesterase genes were produced by homologous recombination.
  • transgenic mice comprising disruptions in cGMP phosphodiesterase genes were created.
  • a cGMP phosphodiesterase gene targeting construct having the ability to disrupt and mutate cGMP phosphodiesterase genes, specifically comprising SEQ ID NO: 34, was created using the oligonucleotide sequences identified herein as SEQ ED NO:35 and SEQ ED NO:36.
  • the targeting construct was inserted into ES cells derived from the 129/OlaHsd mouse substrain to generate chimeric mice.
  • FI mice were generated by breeding with C57BL/6 females.
  • F2 homozygous mutant mice were produced by intercrossing FI heterozygous males and females.
  • the transgenic animals comprising disruptions in cGMP phosphodiesterase genes were analyzed for phenotypic changes and expression patterns.
  • the phenotypes associated with a disruption in cGMP phosphodiesterase genes were determined as follows: Horn ozygous Mice :
  • the homozygous mice demonstrated at least one of the following phenotypes: Eyes. Homozygous mice demonstrated eye abnormalities, particularly involving the retina and more specifically, retinal degeneration (RD), including severe bilateral retinal degeneration or retinal dysplasia, accompanied with complete absence of photoreceptor layers (i.e., rods and cones, outer nuclear layer, outer plexiform layer).
  • the rods and cones are the dendrites of the photoreceptor cells
  • the outer nuclear layer represents the nuclei of the photoreceptor cells
  • the outer plexiform layer represents the axon fibers of the photoreceptor cells.
  • eye abnormalities may be accompanied by vision problems or blindness.
  • mice Other changes in the eyes of these mice included: thinning and vacuolation of the inner nuclear layer; thinning of the inner plexiform layer; loss of ganglion cell nuclei, especially large ganglion cells; gliosis of the nerve fiber layer; and, attenuation of retinal vasculature.
  • the RD observed in mice is analogous to retinitis pigmentosa (RP) in humans.
  • Aorta Abnormality in the aorta included adventitia or inflammation of the aorta.
  • Kidney The kidney abnormalities included tubular dilation or pyelitis.
  • Liver The liver abnormalities detected included extramedullary hematopoiesis.
  • lymphoid hyperplasia included lymphoid hyperplasia, lymphoid atrophy, or hemorrhage.
  • Skin Skin abnormalities included dermatitis.
  • Body Weight Abnormalities included increased body weights and length. Specifically, body weight was increased by about 11%-37% in males, and body length was increased by about 13% over control mice. Body weight to body length ratio was increased about 23%. Organ Weight. Increased organ weights were found in the spleen and thymus gland, kidney and liver. Specifically, spleen weight increases ranged from about 13% to 28%, and thymus gland weight increases ranged from about 17% to 30%. Kidney weight was increased by about 16% and liver weight was increased by about 38%.
  • ALT alanine aminotransferase
  • phosphorus phosphorus
  • potassium phosphorus
  • mice Behavioral Analysis. Homozygous mice exhibited significantly increased activity, traveling a much greater total distance and exploring the open field more in the open field test. This observation indicated hyperactivity in the homozygous mice.
  • Heterozygous Mice Eyes. Eye abnormalities included discoloration including pink eyes.
  • LacZ beta-galactosidase expression was detected in the thyroid glands, salivary glands proper, salivary glands of the larynx, peritracheal and submucosal glands of the trachea and the mucous glands of the tongue.
  • disruptions in sulfotransferase genes were produced by homologous recombination.
  • transgenic mice comprising disruptions in sulfotransferase genes were created.
  • a sulfotransferase gene targeting construct having the ability to disrupt or modify sulfotransferase genes, specifically genes comprising SEQ ID NO:37, was created using the oligonucleotide sequences identified herein as SEQ ID NO:38 and SEQ ID NO:39.
  • the targeting construct was introduced into ES cells derived from the 129/OlaHsd mouse substrain to generate chimeric mice.
  • FI mice were generated by breeding with C57BL/6 females. F2 homozygous mutant mice were produced by intercrossing FI heterozygous males and females. The animals were evaluated for phenotypic changes. The phenotypes associated with a disruption in a sulfotransferase gene were determined as follows: Homozygous Mice:
  • the homozygous mice demonstrated abnormalities in the liver as compared to wild-type mice.
  • the homozygous mice demonstrated at least one of the following: patchy pallor of acinar zone 3 hepatocytes; eosinophilic globules of varying size with intranuclear invaginations within the cytoplasm of hepatocytes; or anisocytosis, anisonucleosis and increased mitotic cellular activity as compared to wild-type mice.
  • Salivary Glands Homozygous mice demonstrated abnormalities in the Harderian glands and salivary glands. Specifically, there was focal pigment deposition in the glands and atrophy and fibrosis in the submandibular gland. Behavioral Analysis. The homozygous mice demonstrated aggressive, hyperactive and less anxious behavior as compared to wild-type mice. Specifically, beginning at two weeks of age, the homozygote mutant male mice exhibited increased aggression compare to wild-type littermates. During home cage observations, these animals attacked their cage- mates more than normal male mice, and had to be housed separately to prevent such attacks. In addition, the homozygote mutant mice were significantly different from the wild-type mice in the open field test. Mutants were hyperactive moving about, and exploring the open field more readily than wild-type mice, exhibiting increased activity and decreased anxiety compared to the wild-type mice.
  • the homozygote mice were significantly different from wild-types in the Open field (% of time spent in central). The homozygous mice were less anxious spending a higher percentage of time in the central portion of the open field than the wild-type mice.

Abstract

The present invention relates to transgenic animals, as well as compositions and methods relating to the characterization of gene function. Specifically, the present invention provides transgenic mice comprising disruptions in genes, which are useful as models for disease and for identifying agents that modulate gene expression and gene function, and as potential treatments for various disease states and disease conditions.

Description

TRANSGENIC MICE CONTAINING TARGETED GENE DISRUPTIONS
Related Applications
This application claims priority to U.S. Application No. 60/190,348, filed March 16, 2000; U.S. Application No. 60/191,128, filed March 22, 2000; U.S. Application No. 60/191,236, filed March 22, 2000; U.S. Application No. 60/191,235, filed March 22, 2000; U.S. Application No. 60/191,129, filed March 22, 2000; U.S. Application No. 60/191,142, filed March 22, 2000; U.S. Application No. 60/191,240, filed March 22, 2000; U.S. Application No. 60/204,227, filed May 15, 2000; U.S. Application No. 60/204,230, filed May 15, 2000; U.S. Application No. 60/215,214, filed June 29, 2000; U.S. Application No. 60/216,249, filed July 6, 2000; U.S. Application No. 60/216,264, filed July 6, 2000; U.S. Application No. 60/216,765, filed July 6, 2000; U.S. Application No. 60/218,075, filed July 12, 2000; U.S. Application No. 60/219,167, filed July 19, 2000; U.S. Application No. 60/219,182, filed July 19, 2000; U.S. Application No. 60/221,485, filed July 27, 2000; and U.S. Application No. 60/223,173, filed August 7, 2000.
Field of the Invention
The present invention relates to transgenic animals, compositions and methods relating to the characterization of gene function.
Background of the Invention
Experimental animal models are important tools for understanding the role of genes. More particularly, the ability to develop animals with specific genes altered or inactivated has been invaluable to the study of gene function, and has lead to unexpected discoveries of a gene and/or mechanisms responsible for disease with similar manifestations in humans. These genetically engineered animals are also useful for identifying and testing therapeutic treatments for a variety of diseases and disorders.
The identification of the function of numerous genes have been useful in ascertaining their roles in disease. Because of the high level of homology between humans and mice, it is possible to define the function of individual human genes by making targeted germline mutations in selected genes in the mouse. The phenotype of the resulting mutant mice can be used to help define the phenotype in humans. Several interesting genes have recently been discovered. Identifying the roles of these genes and their expression products may permit the definition of disease pathways and the identification of diagnostically and therapeutical ly useful targets.
Many medically significant biological processes are mediated by proteins participating in signal transduction pathways that involve G-proteins and/or second messengers such as cAMP. The membrane protein gene superfamily of G-protein coupled receptors (GPCRs) include a wide range of biologically active receptors, such as hormone, viral, growth factor and neuroreceptors. GPCRs have been characterized as having seven putative transmembrane domains (designated TM1, TM2, TM3, TM4, TM5, TM6, and TM7), which are believed to represent transmembrane α-helices connected by extracellular or cytoplasmic loops. Most G-protein coupled receptors have single conserved cysteine residues in each of the first two extracellular loops which form disulfide bonds that are believed to stabilize functional protein structure. G-protein coupled receptors can be intracellularly coupled by heterotrimeric G-proteins to various intracellular enzymes, ion channels and transporters. Different G-protein α-subunits preferentially stimulate particular effectors to modulate various biological functions in a cell.
Nuclear receptor genes that may be potentially important in retinal diseases, specifically retina-specific nuclear receptor genes have been identified. (Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 96: 15149). The retina-specific nuclear receptor may be a potential regulator of cellular retinaldehyde-binding protein expressed in retinal pigment epithelium and glial cells. Such genes have been postulated to regulate the visual cycle through its interaction with cellular retinaldehyde binding protein.
A lymphoid-specific member of the GPCR family has been identified by PCR with degenerate oligonucleotides. (Genomics 23(3), 643-50 (1994)). This receptor, reported as the Epstein-Barr-induced cDNA EBIl, is expressed in normal lymphoid tissues and in several B- and T-lymphocyte cell lines. The gene is encoded on human chromosome 17ql2-q21.2. None of the other G-protein-coupled receptors has been mapped to this region, but the C-C chemokine family has been mapped to 17ql l-q21. The mouse EBIl cDNA has also been isolated and encodes a protein with 86% identity to the human homolog. The murine EBIl is a C-C chemokine type 7 receptor (variously referred to as CCR-7, C-C CKR-7 or CC-CKR- 7). Although its gene structure may be known, the function and ligand EBIl are unknown. Melanocyte stimulating hormones (MSH) regulates pigmentation function. This peptide also has a variety of biological activities in other areas, including the brain, the pituitary, and the immune system. The murine melanocyte stimulating hormone receptor (MSH-R) mRNA has been cloned (1260 bp) and found to define a subfamily of receptors coupled to guanine nucleotide-binding proteins that may include the cannabinoid receptor (Science 257(5074), 1248-1251 (1992)).
Phosphatases represent unique and attractive targets for small-molecule inhibition and pharmacological intervention. The protein phosphorylation/dephosphorylation cycle is one of the major regulatory mechanisms employed by eukaryotic cells to control cellular activities including growth and differentiation, cell-to-cell contacts, the cell cycle, and oncogenesis. It is estimated that more than 10% of the active proteins in a typical mammalian cell are phosphorylated. During protein phosphorylation/dephosphorylation, phosphate groups are transferred from adenosine triphosphate (ATP) molecules to a protein by protein kinases and are removed from the protein by protein phosphatases.
Since nearly all forms of human neoplasias have altered cell cycle control, the role of phosphatases in cell cycle control makes these molecules attractive targets for pharmaceutical intervention. The ability of phosphatase inhibitors to interfere with aberrant cell activity has been demonstrated. For example, the naturally occurring serine/threonine phosphatase inhibitor okadaic acid has been shown to induce apoptosis in myeloid leukemia cells (J. Cell. Physiol. 150, 484 (1992)) and in rat hepatocytes, rat pituitary adenoma cell, human mammary carcinoma cells and human neuroblastoma cells (Exp. Cell Res. 195, 237 (1991)).
Magnesium dependent protein phosphatases appears to participate in a wide variety of functions including regulating cAMP-activated protein-kinase activity, Ca2+-dependent signal transduction, tRNA splicing, and signal transmission related to heat shock responses.
Recently, it was reported that the complete cDNA sequence encoding PP2C, alpha isoform (or PP2C-alpha) was cloned from mouse brain. PP2C-alpha (Gl or NID Number: 532678; Accession Number: D28117) is a 1387 bp sequence which encodes a protein of 382 amino acids with a calculated molecular mass of 42,432 Da (Gene 145(2), 311-312 (1994)). Another important GPCR subfamily is the chemokine receptor family which are known as chemotactic cytokines. The mechanism of chemokine action involves initial specific binding to seven transmembrane spanning GPCRs on target cells. The central role of chemokines in inflammatory reactions has been demonstrated by numerous studies. Local administration of alpha chemokines, e.g., IL-8, by subcutaneous injection results in acute inflammatory reactions that are dominated by neutrophil infiltration. Recently, the cloning of a rat CXC chemokine receptorl (CXCR1) gene has been reported (J. Biol. Chem. 271(51), 32770-6 (1996)). This CXCR1 gene (Gl or NED number: 1589930; Accession number: U7 089) is homologous to the human interleukin-8 (IL-8) receptors, having an amino acid sequence approximately 70-85% identical to the human IL-8 A and B receptor subtypes, and homologous also to the murine CXCR1 gene.
Phosphodiesterases (PDEs) are a class of enzymes responsible for the degradation of phosphodiester bonds. In particular, cyclic nucleotide phosphodiesterases (CN-PDEs) show specificity for purine cyclic nucleotide substrates and hydrolyze cyclic adenosine monophosphate (cAMP) and cyclic guanosine monophosphate (cGMP) (Pharmac. Ther. 51, 13-33 (1991)). CN-PDEs regulate the steady-state levels of cAMP and cGMP and modulate both the amplitude and duration of cyclic nucleotide signals. In turn, cAMP and cGMP are important "second messenger" molecules in signal transduction, the general process by which cells respond to extracellular signals (hormones, drugs, neurotransmitters, growth and differentiation factors, and other agents). Signal transduction regulates all types of cell functions including cell proliferation, differentiation, and gene transcription. At least eight different but homologous gene subfamilies of CN-PDEs are currently known to exist in mammalian tissues.
Members of the type 6 subfamily of PDE (PDE6) are associated with retinal phototransduction (J. Biol. Chem. 266, 10711-14 (1991)). In phototransduction, light impinging on a photoreceptor cell triggers a nerve signal by activating a cascade of biochemical events leading to the hydrolysis of cGMP by PDE6. PDE6 is a tetrameric protein composed of catalytic alpha and beta (α and β) subunits, and two inhibitory gamma (γ) subunits. Dissociation of the inhibitory gamma subunits from the enzyme complex is induced by a membrane-associated protein called transducin and activates the enzyme. PDE6 defects have been associated with hereditary retinal degenerative diseases, characterized by retinal degeneration. Given the importance of phosphodiesterases, particularly PDEs associated with retinal function (e.g., PDE6), a clear need exists for identification and characterization of phosphodiesterases which can play a role in preventing, ameliorating or coιτecting dysfunctions or diseases, and, especially, vision-related dysfunctions and diseases, such as retinal degeneration (RD) and, specifically, retinitis pigmentosa (RP).
The metabolism of many drugs, xenobiotics, neurotransmitters and hormones includes a step involving the enzymatic addition of a sulfate (S04) group. The addition of a sulfate group is commonly referred to as sulfate conjugation, or simply sulfation. The enzymes responsible for sulfate conjugation are known as sulfotransferases (or ST's), as they act by transferring a sulfate group from one biological molecule (the sulfate donor) to another (the sulfate acceptor) in a sulfotransferase reaction. Cytosolic sulfotransferase enzymes in human liver have been subjected to intensive research because sulfation increases the water solubility of most compounds and, therefore, their renal excretion. Sulfation also usually results in a decrease in biological activity. However, in some cases, sulfate conjugation is required to activate drugs such as the antihypertensive medication minoxidil (Biochem. Pharmacol., 31 , 2949-2954 (1982)), and it can also play a role in the bioactivation of procarcinogens such as hydroxylarylamines (Science, 215, 403 (1982); Chem. Biol. Interact. 109, 221-35 (1998)).
To date, genetic engineering efforts in the field of sulfate metabolism have resulted in the cloning and expression of cDNAs for several sulfotransferase enzymes: human liver DHEA ST (Mol. Pharmacol. 41, 865-872 (1992)), TS PST (Mol. Pharmacol. 43, 70-77 (1993)), TL PST (Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun. 198, 1119-1127 (1994)) and a group of estrogen sulfotransferases isolated from several tissues of nonhuman mammalian species (Aust. J. Biol. Sci. 41, 507-516 (1988); Mol. Endocrinol. 6, 589-597 (1992)).
Also, the cDNA sequence (1269 bp) of the mouse liver phenol/aryl form of sulfotransferase (mSTpl) has been determined (Biochim. Biophys. Acta 1171(3), 315-8 (1993)). The cloned cDNA was reported to contain an 897 nucleotide open reading frame (ORF) beginning at nucleotide 65, which encodes a 298 amino acid polypeptide of 34.7 kD. The STp l gene has Gl or NH) number 201069 and Accession number L02331. The human STpl gene has been extensively characterized (Pharmaco genetics 6, 473-487 (1996); Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun. 228, 134-140 (1996)). The STpl gene is also referred to as the SULT1A1 gene.
Experimental animal models would provide an important tool in understanding the roles of retina-specific nuclear receptor genes, lymphoid-specific GPCR genes, melanocyte stimulating hormone receptor genes, magnesium-dependent protein phosphatase genes, chemokine receptor 1-like protein genes, cGMP phosphodiesterase genes and sulfotransferase genes. Such understanding of their roles may permit the definition of disease pathways, the identification of diagnostically and therapeutically useful targets, and the testing and investigating of potential therapeutic treatments.
Summary of the Invention The present invention generally relates to transgenic animals, as well as to compositions and methods relating to the characterization of gene function. More specifically, the present invention relates to various genes and their in vivo characterization and function. The present invention provides transgenic cells comprising a disruption in a target gene. The transgenic cells of the present invention are comprised of any cells capable of undergoing homologous recombination. Preferably the cells of the present invention are stem cells and more preferably, embryonic stem (ES) cells, and most preferably, murine ES cells. According to one embodiment, the transgenic cells are produced by introducing a targeting construct into a stem cell to produce a homologous recombinant, resulting in a mutation of the target gene. In another embodiment, the transgenic cells are derived from the transgenic animals described below. The cell derived from the transgenic animals includes cells that are isolated or present in a tissue or organ, and any cell lines or any progeny thereof.
The present invention also provides a targeting construct and methods of producing the targeting construct that when introduced into stem cells produces a homologous recombinant. In one embodiment, the targeting construct of the present invention comprises first and second polynucleotide sequences that are homologous to the target gene. The targeting construct also comprises a polynucleotide sequence that encodes a selectable marker that is preferably positioned between the two different homologous polynucleotide sequences in the construct. The targeting construct may also comprise other regulatory elements that may enhance homologous recombination.
The present invention further provides non-human transgenic animals and methods of producing such non-human transgenic animals comprising a disruption in a target gene. The transgenic animals of the present invention include transgenic animals that are heterozygous and homozygous for a mutation in the target gene. In one aspect, the transgenic animals of the present invention are defective in the function of the target gene. In another aspect, the transgenic animals of the present invention comprise a phenotype associated with having a mutation in a target gene.
The present invention also provides methods of identifying agents capable of affecting a phenotype of a transgenic animal. For example, a putative agent is administered to the transgenic animal and a response of the transgenic animal to the putative agent is measured and compared to the response of a "normal" or wild type mouse, or alternatively compared to a transgenic animal control (without agent administration). The invention further provides agents identified according to such methods. The present invention also provides methods of identifying agents useful as therapeutic agents for treating conditions associated with a disruption of the target gene.
The present invention further provides a method of identifying agents having an effect on target gene expression or function. The method includes administering an effective amount of the agent to a transgenic animal, preferably a mouse, having a disruption in a target gene. The method includes measuring a response of the transgenic animal, for example, to the agent, and comparing the response of the transgenic animal to a control animal, which may be, for example, a wild-type animal or alternatively, a transgenic animal control. Compounds that may have an effect on gene expression or function may also be screened against cells in cell-based assays, for example, to identify such compounds.
The invention also provides cell lines comprising nucleic acid sequences of a target gene. Such cell lines may be capable of expressing such sequences by virtue of operable linkage to a promoter functional in the cell line. Preferably, expression of the target gene sequence is under the control of an inducible promoter. Also provided are methods of identifying agents that interact with the target gene, comprising the steps of contacting the target gene with an agent and detecting an agent/target gene complex. Such complexes can be detected by, for example, measuring expression of an operably linked detectable marker.
The invention further provides methods of treating diseases or conditions associated with a disruption in a target gene, and more particularly, to a disruption in the expression or function of the target gene. In a preferred embodiment, methods of the present invention involve treating diseases or conditions associated with a disruption in the target gene's expression or function, including administering to a subject in need, a therapeutic agent which effects target gene expression or function. In accordance with this embodiment, the method comprises administration of a therapeutically effective amount of a natural, synthetic, semi-synthetic, or recombinant target gene, target gene products or fragments thereof as well as natural, synthetic, semi-synthetic or recombinant analogs.
The present invention further provides methods of treating diseases or conditions associated with disrupted targeted gene expression or function, wherein the methods comprise detecting and replacing through gene therapy mutated target genes.
Definitions
As used herein, "gene" refers to (a) a gene containing at least one of the DNA sequences disclosed herein; (b) any DNA sequence that encodes the amino acid sequence encoded by the DNA sequences disclosed herein and/or; (c) any DNA sequence that hybridizes to the complement of the coding sequences disclosed herein. Preferably, the term includes coding as well as noncoding regions, and preferably includes all sequences necessary for normal gene expression including promoters, enhancers and other regulatory sequences. The terms "polynucleotide" and "nucleic acid molecule" are used interchangeably to refer to polymeric forms of nucleotides of any length. The polynucleotides may contain deoxyribonucleotides, ribonucleotides and/or their analogs. Nucleotides may have any three- dimensional structure, and may perform any function, known or unknown. The term "polynucleotide" includes single-, double-stranded and triple helical molecules. "Oligonucleotide" refers to polynucleotides of between 5 and about 100 nucleotides of single- or double-stranded DNA. Oligonucleotides are also known as oligomers or oligos and may be isolated from genes, or chemically synthesized by methods known in the art. A "primer" refers to an oligonucleotide, usually single-stranded, that provides a 3'-hydroxyl end for the initiation of enzyme-mediated nucleic acid synthesis. The following are non-limiting embodiments of polynucleotides: a gene or gene fragment, exons, introns, mRNA, tRNA, rRNA, ribozymes, cDNA, recombinant polynucleotides, branched polynucleotides, plasmids, vectors, isolated DNA of any sequence, isolated RNA of any sequence, nucleic acid probes and primers. A nucleic acid molecule may also comprise modified nucleic acid molecules, such as methylated nucleic acid molecules and nucleic acid molecule analogs. Analogs of purines and pyrimidines are known in the art, and include, but are not limited to, aziridinycytosine, 4-acetylcytosine, 5- fluorouracil, 5-bromouracil, 5-carboxymethylaminomethyl-2-thiouracil, 5-carboxymethyl- aminomethyl uracil, inosine, N6-isopentenyladenine, 1-methyladenine, 1-methylpseudouracil, 1-methylguanine, 1-methylinosine, 2,2-dimethylguanine, 2-methyladenine, 2-methyl guanine, 3-methylcytosine, 5-methylcytosine, pseudouracil, 5-pentylnyluracil and 2,6-diaminopurine. The use of uracil as a substitute for thymine in a deoxyribonucleic acid is also considered an analogous form of pyrimidine.
A "fragment" of a polynucleotide is a polynucleotide comprised of at least 9 contiguous nucleotides, preferably at least 15 contiguous nucleotides and more preferably at least 45 nucleotides, of coding or non-coding sequences.
As used herein, "base pair," also designated "bp," refers to the complementary nucleic acid molecules. In DNA there are four "types" of bases: the purine base adenine (A) is hydrogen bonded with the pyrimidine base thymine (T), and the purine base guanine (G) with the pyrimidine base cytosine (C). Each hydrogen bonded base pair set is also known as a Watson-Crick base-pair. A thousand base pairs is often called a kilobase pair, or kb. A "base pair mismatch" refers to a location in a nucleic acid molecule in which the bases are not complementary Watson-Crick pairs. The phrase "does not include at least one type of base at any position" refers to a nucleotide sequence which does not have one of the four bases at any position. For example, a sequence lacking one nucleotide (i.e., lacking one type of base) could be made up of A, G, T base pairs and contain no C residues.
As used herein, "gene targeting" is a type of homologous recombination that occurs when a fragment of genomic DNA is introduced into a mammalian cell and that fragment locates and recombines with endogenous homologous sequences. The term "homologous recombination" refers to the exchange of DNA fragments between two DNA molecules or chromatids at the site of homologous nucleotide sequences. The term "homologous" as used herein denotes a characteristic of a DNA sequence having at least about 70 percent sequence identity as compared to a reference sequence, typically at least about 85 percent sequence identity, preferably at least about 95 percent sequence identity, and more preferably about 98 percent sequence identity, and most preferably about 100 percent sequence identity as compared to a reference sequence. Homology can be determined using a "BLASTN" algorithm. It is understood that homologous sequences can accommodate insertions, deletions and substitutions in the nucleotide sequence. Thus, linear sequences of nucleotides can be essentially identical even if some of the nucleotide residues do not precisely correspond or align. The reference sequence may be a subset of a larger sequence, such as a portion of a gene or flanking sequence, or a repetitive portion of a chromosome.
As used herein, the term "target gene" (alternatively referred to as "target gene sequence" or "target DNA sequence" or "target sequence") refers to any nucleic acid molecule or polynucleotide of any gene to be modified by homologous recombination. The target sequence includes an intact gene, an exon or intron, a regulatory sequence or any region between genes. In one aspect, the nucleic acid molecule having a sequence in the general population is not associated with any disease or discernible phenotype. It is noted that in the general population, wild-type genes may include multiple prevalent versions that contain alterations in sequence relative to each other and yet do not cause a discernible pathological effect. These variations are designated "polymorphisms" or "allelic variations." The target gene comprises a portion of a particular gene or genetic locus in the individual's genomic DNA. As provided herein, the target gene of the present invention consists of a retina-specific nuclear receptor gene, a lymphoid-specific GPCR gene, a melanocyte stimulating hormone receptor gene, a magnesium-dependent protein phosphatase gene, a chemokine receptor 1-like protein gene, an cGMP phosphodiesterase gene and a sulfotransferase gene, or a naturally occurring allelic variation or homologue thereof. As used herein, the term "retina-specific nuclear receptor gene" refers to a sequence comprising SEQ ID NO: 19 or the retina-specific nuclear receptor gene identified in Genebank as Accession No.: AF148129; Gl NO: 6651226. In one aspect, the coding sequence of the retina-specific nuclear receptor gene comprises SEQ ID NO: 19 or the sequence identified in Genebank as Accession No.: AF148129; Gl NO: 6651226. As used herein, the term "lymphoid-specific GPCR gene" refers to a sequence comprising SEQ ID NO:22 or the lymphoid-specific GPCR gene in Genebank as Accession No.: L31580; Gl NO: 468340. In one aspect, the coding sequence of the lymphoid-specific GPCR gene comprises SEQ ID NO:22 or the sequence identified in Genebank as Accession No.: L31580; GI NO: 468340. As used herein, the term "melanocyte stimulating hormone receptor gene" refers to a sequence comprising SEQ ED NO:25 or the melanocyte stimulating hormone receptor gene identified in Genebank as Accession No.: X65635; Gl NO: 53244. In one aspect, the coding sequence of the melanocyte stimulating hormone receptor gene comprises SEQ ED NO:25 or the sequence identified in Genebank as Accession No.: X65635; Gl NO: 53244. As used herein, the term "magnesium-dependent protein phosphatase gene" refers to a sequence comprising SEQ ED NO:28 or the magnesium-dependent protein phosphatase gene identified in Genebank as Accession No.: D28117; Gl NO: 532678. In one aspect, the coding sequence of the magnesium-dependent protein phosphatase gene comprises SEQ ED NO:28 or the sequence identified in Genebank as Accession No.: D281 17; Gl NO: 532678. As used herein, the term "chemokine receptor 1-like protein gene" refers to a sequence comprising SEQ ED NO:31 or the chemokine receptor 1-like protein gene identified in Genebank as Accession No.: U71089; Gl NO: 1589930. In one aspect, the coding sequence of the chemokine receptor 1-like protein gene comprises SEQ ED NO:31 or the sequence identified in Genebank as Accession No.: U71089; Gl NO: 1589930. As used herein, the term an "cGMP phosphodiesterase gene" refers to a sequence comprising SEQ ID NO:34 or the cGMP phosphodiesterase gene identified in Genebank as Accession No.: X60664; Gl NO: 53587. In one aspect, the coding sequence of the cGMP phosphodiesterase gene comprises SEQ ED NO: 34 or the sequence identified in Genebank as Accession No.: X60664; Gl NO: 53587. As used herein, the term a "sulfotransferase gene" refers to a sequence comprising
SEQ ED NO:37 or the sulfotransferase gene identified in Genebank as Accession No.: L02331 ; Gl NO: 201069. In one aspect, the coding sequence of the sulfotransferase gene comprises SEQ ED NO:37 or the sequence identified in Genebank as Accession No.:
L02331; GI NO: 201069.
"Disruption" of a target gene occurs when a fragment of genomic DNA locates and recombines with an endogenous homologous sequence. These sequence disruptions or modifications may include insertions, missense, frameshift, deletion, or substitutions, or replacements of DNA sequence, or any combination thereof. Insertions include the insertion of entire genes which may be of animal, plant, prokaryotic, or viral origin. Disruption, for example, can alter or replace a promoter, enhancer, or splice site of a target gene, and can alter the normal gene product by inhibiting its production partially or completely or by enhancing the normal gene product's activity. The term, "transgenic cell", refers to a cell containing within its genome a target gene that has been disrupted, modified, altered, or replaced completely or partially by the method of gene targeting.
As used herein, a "transgenic animal" is an animal that contains within its genome a specific gene that has been disrupted or inactivated completely or partially by the method of gene targeting. The transgenic animal includes both the heterozygote animal (i.e., one defective allele and one wild-type allele) and the homozygous animal (i.e., two defective alleles).
As used herein, the term "construct" refers to an artificially assembled DNA segment to be transferred into a target tissue, cell line or animal, including human. Typically, the construct will include the gene or a sequence of particular interest, a marker gene and appropriate control sequences. The term "plasmid" refers to an autonomous, self-replicating extrachromosomal DNA molecule. In a preferred embodiment, the plasmid construct of the present invention contains a positive selection marker positioned between two flanking regions of the gene of interest. Optionally, the construct can also contain a screening marker, for example, green fluorescent protein (GFP). If present, the screening marker is positioned outside of and some distance away from the flanking regions.
As used herein, the terms "selectable marker" or "positive selection marker" refers to a gene encoding a product that enables only the cells that carry the gene to survive and/or grow under certain conditions. For example, plant and animal cells that express the introduced neomycin resistance (Neo1) gene are resistant to the compound G418. Cells that do not carry the Neor gene marker are killed by G418. Other positive selection markers will be known to those of skill in the art. "Positive-negative selection" refers to the process of selecting cells that carry a DNA insert integrated at a specific targeted location (positive selection) and also selecting against cells that cany a DNA insert integrated at a non-targeted chromosomal site (negative selection). Non-limiting examples of negative selection inserts include the gene encoding thymidine kinase (tk). Genes suitable for positive-negative selection are known in the art, see e.g., U.S. Patent 5,464,764.
"Screening marker" or "reporter gene" refers to a gene that encodes a product that can readily be assayed. For example, reporter genes can be used to determine whether a particular DNA construct has been successfully introduced into a cell, organ or tissue. Non- limiting examples of screening markers include genes encoding for green fluorescent protein (GFP) or genes encoding for a modified fluorescent protein. "Negative screening marker" is not to be construed as negative selection marker; a negative selection marker typically kills cells that express it.
The term "vector" refers to a DNA molecule that can carry inserted DNA and be perpetuated in a host cell. Vectors are also known as cloning vectors, cloning vehicles or vehicles. The term includes vectors that function primarily for insertion of a nucleic acid molecule into a cell, replication vectors that function primarily for the replication of nucleic acid, and expression vectors that function for transcription and/or translation of the DNA or RNA. Also included are vectors that provide more than one of the above functions.
A "host cell" includes an individual cell or cell culture which can be or has been a recipient for vector(s) or for incorporation of nucleic acid molecules and/or proteins. Host cells include progeny of a single host cell, and the progeny may not necessarily be completely identical (in morphology or in total DNA complement) to the original parent due to natural, accidental, or deliberate mutation. A host cell includes cells transfected with the constructs of the present invention. The term "genomic library" refers to a collection of clones made from a set of randomly generated overlapping DNA fragments representing the genome of an organism. A "cDNA library" (complementary DNA library) is a collection of mRNA molecules present in a cell, tissue, or organism, turned into cDNA molecules with the enzyme reverse transcriptase, then inserted into vectors (other DNA molecules which can continue to replicate after addition of foreign DNA). Exemplary vectors for libraries include bacteriophage (also known as "phage"), which are viruses that infect bacteria, for example lambda phage. The library can then be probed for the specific cDNA (and thus mRNA) of interest. In one embodiment, library systems which combine the high efficiency of a phage vector system with the convenience of a plasmid system (for example, ZAP system from Stratagene, La Jolla, CA) are used in the practice of the present invention.
The term "exonuclease" refers to an enzyme that cleaves nucleotides sequentially from the free ends of a linear nucleic acid substrate. Exonucleases can be specific for double or single-stranded nucleotides and/or directionally specific, for instance, 3 -5' and/or 5'-3'. Some exonucleases exhibit other enzymatic activities, for example, T4 DNA polymerase is both a polymerase and an active 3 -5' exonuclease. Other exemplary exonucleases include exonuclease III which removes nucleotides one at a time from the 5 '-end of duplex DNA which does not have a phosphorylated 3 '-end, exonuclease VI which makes oligonucleotides by cleaving nucleotides off of both ends of single-stranded DNA, and exonuclease lambda which removes nucleotides from the 5' end of duplex DNA which have 5'-phosphate groups attached to them.
The term "recombinase" encompasses enzymes that induce, mediate or facilitate recombination, and other nucleic acid modifying enzymes that cause, mediate or facilitate the rearrangement of a nucleic acid sequence, or the excision or insertion of a first nucleic acid sequence from or into a second nucleic acid sequence. The "target site" of a recombinase is the nucleic acid sequence or region that is recognized (e.g., specifically binds to) and/or acted upon (excised, cut or induced to recombine) by the recombinase. As used herein, the expression "enzyme-directed site-specific recombination" is intended to include the following events: deletion of a pre-selected DNA segment flanked by recombinase target sites; inversion of the nucleotide sequence of a pre-selected DNA segment flanked by recombinase target sites; and reciprocal exchange of DNA segments proximate to recombinase target sites located on different DNA molecules.
The term "modulates" as used herein refers to the inhibition, reduction or enhancement of a target gene's function, expression, or alternatively a phenotype associated with a disruption in a target gene.
The term "ameliorates" refers to a decreasing, reducing or eliminating a condition, disease, disorder, or phenotype, including an abnormality or symptom associated with a disruption in a target gene.
The term "abnormality" refers to any disease, disorder, condition, or a phenotype in which a disruption of a target gene is implicated, including pathological conditions. Brief Description of the Drawings
Figure 1 is a schematic depicting one method of constructing a targeting vector of the present invention. The plasmid PCR method is described in Examples 9 and 10.
Figure 2A is a schematic depicting the pDG2 vector. The vector contains an ampicillin resistance gene and a neomycin (Neo1) gene. On each side of the Neor gene are two sites for ligation-independent cloning along with restriction sites. The sequence of pDG2 is shown in Figure 2B and SEQ ED NO: l.
Figure 3A is schematic depicting the pDG4 vector. The vector contains an ampicillin resistance gene, a neomycin (Neo1) gene and a green fluorescent protein (GFP) gene. On each side of the Neor gene are two sites for ligation-independent cloning along with restriction enzyme recognition sites. The sequence of pDG4 is shown in Figure 3B and SEQ E NO:2.
Figure 4 (SEQ ID NO:3 through SEQ ED NO: 10) shows the nucleic acid sequence before and after T4 DNA polymerase treatment of annealing sites 1-4 contained on the ends of PCR-amplified genomic DNA. Figure 5 (SEQ ID NO: l l through SEQ ED NO:18) shows the nucleic acid sequence before and after T4 DNA polymerase treatment of annealing site 1-4 contained within the pDG2 vector.
Figure 6 shows the arrangement of 5' and 3' flanking DNA relative to annealing sites 1, 2, 3 and 4 within the pDG2 vector during an annealing reaction. Figure 7 shows the arrangement of 5' and 3' flanking DNA relative to annealing sites
1, 2, 3 and 4 and the GFP screening marker within the pDG4 vector during an annealing reaction.
Figure 8 shows the polynucleotide sequence identified as SEQ ED NO: 19. Figure 8 also shows the sequences identified as SEQ ED NO:20 and SEQ ED NO:21, which were used in the retina-specific nuclear receptor gene targeting construct.
Figure 9 shows the polynucleotide sequence identified as SEQ ED NO:22. Figure 9 also shows the sequences identified as SEQ ED NO:23 and SEQ ED NO:24, which were used in the lymphoid-specific GPCR gene targeting construct.
Figure 10 shows the polynucleotide sequence identified as SEQ ED NO:25. Figure 10 also shows the sequences identified as SEQ ED NO:26 and SEQ ED NO:27 which were used in the melanocyte stimulating hormone receptor gene targeting construct. Figure 11 shows the polynucleotide sequence identified as SEQ ED NO:28. Figure
11 also shows the sequences identified as SEQ ED NO:29 and SEQ ED NO:30 which were used in the magnesium-dependent protein phosphatase gene targeting construct.
Figure 12 shows the polynucleotide sequence identified as SEQ ED NO:31. Figure
12 also shows the sequences identified as SEQ ED NO:32 and SEQ ED NO:33 which were used in the chemokine receptor 1-like protein gene targeting construct.
Figure 13 shows the polynucleotide sequence identified as SEQ ED NO:34. Figure 13B shows the sequences identified as SEQ ED NO:35 and SEQ ID NO:36 which were used in the cGMP phosphodiesterase gene targeting construct.
Figure 14 shows the polynucleotide sequence identified as SEQ ID NO:37. Figure 14 also shows the sequences identified as SEQ ED NO:36 and SEQ ED NO:37 which were used in the sulfotransferase gene targeting construct.
Detailed Description of the Invention
The invention is based, in part, on the evaluation of the expression and role of genes and gene expression products. Among others, the invention permits the definition of disease pathways and the identification of diagnostically and therapeutically useful targets. For example, genes which are mutated or down-regulated under disease conditions may be involved in causing or exacerbating the disease condition. Treatments directed at up- regulating the activity of such genes or treatments which involve alternate pathways, may ameliorate the disease condition.
Any technique known in the art may be used to introduce a target gene transgene into animals to produce the founder lines of transgenic animals. Such techniques include, but are not limited to pronuclear microinjection (U.S. Pat. No. 4,873,191); retrovirus mediated gene transfer into germ lines (Van der Putten, et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci., USA, 82:6148-6152 (1985)); gene targeting in embryonic stem cells (Thompson, et al., Cell, 56:313-321 (1989)); electroporation of embryos (Lo, Mol Cell. Biol., 3: 1803-1814 (1983)); and sperm-mediated gene transfer (Lavitrano, et al., Cell, 57:717-723 (1989)); etc. For a review of such techniques, see Gordon, Transgenic Animals, Intl. Rev. Cytol, 115: 171-229 (1989), which is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety. In a preferred embodiment, homologous recombination is used to generate the knockout mice of the present invention. Preferably, the construct is generated in two steps by (1) amplifying (for example, using long-range PCR) sequences homologous to the target sequence, and (2) inserting another polynucleotide (for example a selectable marker) into the PCR product so that it is flanked by the homologous sequences. Typically, the vector is a plasmid from a plasmid genomic library. The completed construct is also typically a circular plasmid. Thus, as shown in Figure 1, using long-range PCR with "outwardly pointing" oligonucleotides results in a vector into which a selectable marker can easily be inserted, preferably by ligation-independent cloning. The construct can then be introduced into ES cells, where it can disrupt the function of the homologous target sequence.
Homologous recombination may also be used to knockout genes in stem cells, and other cell types, which are not totipotent embryonic stem cells. By way of example, stem cells may be myeloid, lymphoid, or neural progenitor and precursor cells. Such transgenic cells may be particularly useful in the study of target gene function in individual developmental pathways. Stem cells may be derived from any vertebrate species, such as mouse, rat, dog, cat, pig, rabbit, human, non-human primates and the like.
In cells which are not totipotent it may be desirable to knock out both copies of the target using methods which are known in the art. For example, cells comprising homologous recombination at a target locus which have been selected for expression of a positive selection marker (e.g., Neor) and screened for non-random integration, can be further selected for multiple copies of the selectable marker gene by exposure to elevated levels of the selective agent (e.g., G418). The cells are then analyzed for homozygosity at the target locus. Alternatively, a second construct can be generated with a different positive selection marker inserted between the two homologous sequences. The two constructs can be introduced into the cell either sequentially or simultaneously, followed by appropriate selection for each of the positive marker genes. The final cell is screened for homologous recombination of both alleles of the target.
In another aspect, two separate fragments of a clone of interest are amplified and inserted into a vector containing a positive selection marker using ligation-independent cloning techniques. In this embodiment, the clone of interest is generally from a phage library and is identified and isolated using PCR techniques. The ligation-independent cloning can be performed in two steps or in a single step.
According to a preferred method, constructs are used having multiple sites where 5 -3' single-stranded regions can be created. These constructs, preferably plasmids, include a vector capable of directional, four-way ligation-independent cloning.
The constructs typically include a sequence encoding a positive selection marker such as a gene encoding neomycin resistance; a restriction enzyme site on either side of the positive selection marker and a sequence flanking the restriction enzyme sites which does not contain one of the four base pairs. This configuration allows single-stranded ends to be created in the sequence by digesting the construct with the appropriate restriction enzyme and treating the fragments with a compound having exonuclease activity, for example T4 DNA polymerase.
In one preferred embodiment, a construct suitable for introducing targeted mutations into ES cells is prepared directly from a plasmid genomic library. Using long-range PCR with specific primers, a sequence of interest is identified and isolated from the plasmid library in a single step. Following isolation of this sequence, a second polynucleotide that will disrupt the target sequence can be readily inserted between two regions encoding the sequence of interest. Using this direct method a targeted construct can be created in as little as 72 hours. In another embodiment, a targeted construct is prepared after identification of a clone of interest in a phage genomic library as described in detail below.
The methods described herein obviate the need for hybridization isolation, restriction mapping and multiple cloning steps. Moreover, the function of any gene can be determined using these methods. For example, a short sequence (e.g., EST) can be used to design oligonucleotide probes. These probes can be used in the direct amplification procedure to create constructs or can be used to screen genomic or cDNA libraries for longer full-length genes. Thus, it is contemplated that any gene can be quickly and efficiently prepared for use in ES cells.
In a preferred embodiment, constructs are prepared directly from a plasmid genomic library. The library can be produced by any method known in the art. Preferably, DNA from mouse ES cells is isolated and treated with a restriction endonuclease which cleaves the DNA into fragments. The DNA fragments are then inserted into a vector, for example a bacteriophage or phagemid (e.g., Lamda ZAP™, Stratagene, La Jolla, CA) systems. When the library is created in the ZAP™ system, the DNA fragments are preferably between about 5 and about 20 kilobases.
Preferably, the organism(s) from which the libraries are made will have no discernible disease or phenotypic effects. Preferably, the library is a mouse library. This DNA may be obtained from any cell source or body fluid. Non-limiting examples of cell sources available in clinical practice include ES cells, liver, kidney, blood cells, buccal cells, cerviovaginal cells, epithelial cells from urine, fetal cells, or any cells present in tissue obtained by biopsy. Body fluids include urine, blood cerebrospinal fluid (CSF), and tissue exudates at the site of infection or inflammation. DNA extracted from the cells or body fluid using any method known in the art. Preferably, the DNA is extracted by adding 5 ml of lysis buffer (10 mM Tris-HCI pH 7.5), 10 mM EDTA (pH 8.0), 10 mM NaCI, 0.5% SDS and 1 mg/ml Proteinase K) to a confluent 100 mm plate of embryonic stem cells. The cells are then incubated at about 60°C for several hours or until fully lysed. Genomic DNA is purified from the lysed cells by several rounds of gentle phenolxhloroform extraction followed by an ethanol precipitation. For convenience, the genomic library can be arrayed into pools. In a preferred embodiment, a sequence of interest is identified from the plasmid library using oligonucleotide primers and long-range PCR. Typically, the primers are outwardly-pointing primers which are designed based on sequence information obtained from a partial gene sequence, e.g., a cDNA or an EST sequence. As depicted for example in Figure 1, the product will be a linear fragment that excludes the region which is located between each primer.
PCR conditions found to be suitable are described below in the Examples. It will be understood that optimal PCR conditions can be readily determined by those skilled in the art. (See, e.g., PCR 2: A Practical Approach (1995) eds. M.J. McPherson, B.D. Hames and G.R. Taylor, ERL Press, Oxford; Yu, et al, Methods Mol. Bio., 58:335-9 (1996); Munroe, et al, Proc. Natl Acad. Sci., USA, 92:2209-13 (1995)). PCR screening of libraries eliminates many of the problems and time-delay associated with conventional hybridization screening in which the library must be plated, filters made, radioactive probes prepared and hybridization conditions established. PCR screening requires only oligonucleotide primers to sequences (genes) of interest. PCR products can be purified by a variety of methods, including but not limited to, microfiltration, dialysis, gel electrophoresis and the like. It may be desirable to remove the polymerase used in PCR so that no new DNA synthesis can occur. Suitable thermostable DNA polymerases are commercially available, for example, Vent™ DNA Polymerase (New England Biolabs), Deep Vent™ DNA Polymerase (new England Biolabs), HotTub™ DNA Polymerase (Amersham), Thermo Sequenase™ (Amersham), rBst™ DNA Polymerase (Epicenter), Pfu™ DNA Polymerase (Stratagene), Amplitaq Gold™ (Perkin Elmer), and Expand™ (Boehringer-Mannheim).
To form the completed construct, a sequence which will disrupt the target sequence is inserted into the PCR-amplified product. For example, as described herein, the direct method involves joining the long-range PCR product (i.e., the vector) and one fragment (i.e., a gene encoding a selectable marker). As discussed above, the vector contains two different sequence regions homologous to the target DNA sequence. Preferably, the vector also contains a sequence encoding a selectable marker, such as ampicillin. The vector and fragment are designed so that, when treated to form single stranded ends, they will anneal such that the fragment is positioned between the two different regions of substantial homology to the target gene.
Although any method of cloning is suitable, it is preferred that ligation-independent cloning strategies be used to assemble the construct comprising two different homologous regions flanking a selectable marker. Ligation-independent cloning (LIC) is a strategy for the directional cloning of polynucleotides without the use of kinases or ligases. (See, e.g.,
Aslanidis et al., Nucleic Acids Res., 18:6069-74 (1990); Rashtchian, Current Opin. Biotech., 6:30-36 (1995)). Single-stranded tails (also referred to as cloning sites or annealing sequences) are created in LIC vectors, usually by treating the vector (at a digested restriction enzyme site) with T4 DNA polymerase in the presence of only one dNTP. The 3' to 5' exonuclease activity of T4 DNA polymerase removes nucleotides until it encounters a residue conesponding to the single dNTP present in the reaction mix. At this point, the 5' to 3' polymerase activity of the enzyme counteracts the exonuclease activity to prevent further excision. The vector is designed such that the single-stranded tails created are non- complementary. For example, in the pDG2 vector, none of the single-stranded tails of the four annealing sites are complementary to each other. PCR products are created by building appropriate 5' extensions into oligonucleotide primers. The PCR product is purified to remove dNTPs (and original plasmid if it was used as template) and then treated with T4 DNA polymerase in the presence of the appropriate dNTP to generate the specific vector- compatible overhangs. Cloning occurs by annealing of the compatible tails. Single-stranded tails are created at the ends of the clone fragments, for example using chemical or enzymatic means. Complementary tails are created on the vector; however, to prevent annealing of the vector without insert, the vector tails are not complementary to each other. The length of the tails is at least about 5 nucleotides, preferably at least about 12 nucleotides, even more preferably at least about 20 nucleotides. In one embodiment, placing the overlapping vector and fragment(s) in the same reaction is sufficient to anneal them. Alternatively, the complementary sequences are combined, heated and allowed to slowly cool. Preferably the heating step is between about 60°C and about 100°C, more preferably between about 60°C and 80°C, and even more preferably between 60°C and 70°C. The heated reactions are then allowed to cool. Generally, cooling occurs rather slowly, for instance the reactions are generally at about room temperature after about an hour. The cooling must be sufficiently slow as to allow annealing. The annealed fragment/vector can be used immediately, or stored frozen at -20°C until use. Further, annealing can be performed by adjusting the salt and temperature to achieve suitable conditions. Hybridization reactions can be performed in solutions ranging from about 10 mM NaCI to about 600 mM NaCI, at temperatures ranging from about 37°C to about 65°C. It will be understood that the stringency of the hybridization reaction is determined by both the salt concentration and the temperature. For instance, a hybridization performed in 10 mM salt at 37°C may be of similar stringency to one performed in 500 mM salt at 65°C. For the present invention, any hybridization conditions may be used that form hybrids between homologous complementary sequences.
As shown in Figure 1, in one embodiment, a construct is made after using any of these annealing procedure where the vector portion contains the two different regions of substantial homology to the target gene (amplified from the plasmid library using long-range PCR) and the fragment is a gene encoding a selectable marker.
After annealing, the construct is transformed into competent E. coli cells by methods known in the art, to amplify the construct. The isolated construct is then ready for introduction into ES cells. In another embodiment, a clone of interest is identified in a pooled genomic library using PCR. In one embodiment, the PCR conditions are such that a gene encoding a selectable marker can be inserted directly into the positively identified clone. The marker is positioned between two different sequences having substantial homology to the target DNA. Genomic phage libraries can be prepared by any method known in the art. Preferably, a mouse embryonic stem cell library is prepared in lambda phage by cleaving genomic DNA into fragments of approximately 20 kilobases in length. The fragments are then inserted into any suitable lambda cloning vector, for example lambda Fix π or lambda Dash II (Stratagene, La Jolla, Ca)
In order to quickly and efficiently screen a large number of clones from a library, pools may be created of plated libraries. In a preferred embodiment, a genomic lambda phage library is plated at a density of approximately 1,000 clones (plaques) per plate. Sufficient plates are created to represent the entire genome of the organism several times over. For example, approximately 1 million clones (1000 plates) will yield approximately 8 genome equivalents. The plaques are then collected, for example by overlaying the plate with a buffer solution, incubating the plates and recollecting the buffer. The amount of buffer used will vary according to the plate size, generally one 100 mm diameter plate will be overlayed with approximately 4 ml of buffer and approximately 2 ml will be collected. It will be understood that the individual plate lysates can be pooled at any time during this procedure and that they can be pooled in any combinations. For ease in later identification of single clones, however, it is preferable to keep each plate lysate separately and then make a pool. For example, each 2 ml lysate can be placed in a 96 well deep well plate. Pools can then be formed by taking an amount, preferably about 100 D l, from each well and combining them in the well of a new plate. Preferably, 100 D l of 12 individual plate lysates are combined in one well, forming a 1.2 ml pool representative of 12,000 clones of the library.
Each pool is then PCR-amplified using a set of PCR primers known to amplify the target gene. The target gene can be a known full-length gene or, more preferably, a partial cDNA sequence obtained from publicly available nucleic acid sequence databases such as GenBank or EMBL. These databases include partial cDNA sequences known as expressed sequence tags (ESTs). The oligonucleotide PCR primers can be isolated from any organism by any method known in the art or, preferably, synthesized by chemical means.
Once a positive clone of the target gene has been identified in a genomic library, two fragments encoding separate portions of the target gene must be generated. In other words, the flanking regions of the small known region of the target (e.g., EST) are generated. Although the size of each flanking region is not critical and can range from as few as 100 base pairs to as many as 100 kb, preferably each flanking fragment is greater than about 1 kb in length, more preferably between about 1 and about 10 kb, and even more preferably between about 1 and about 5 kb. One of skill in the art will recognize that although larger fragments may increase the number of homologous recombination events in ES cells, larger fragments will also be more difficult to clone.
In one embodiment, one of the oligonucleotide PCR primers used to amplify a flanking fragment is specific for the library cloning vector, for example lambda phage. Therefore, if the library is a lambda phage library, primers specific for the lambda phage arms can be used in conjunction with primers specific for the positive clone to generate long flanking fragments. Multiple PCR reactions can be set up to test different combinations of primers. Preferably, the primers used will generate flanking sequences between about 2 and about 6 kb in length. Preferably, the oligonucleotide primers are designed with 5' sequences complementary to the vector into which the fragments will be cloned. In addition, the primers are also designed so that the flanking fragments will be in the proper 3 '-5' orientation with respect to the vector and each other when the construct is assembled. Thus, using PCR-based methods, for example, positive clones can be identified by visualization of a band on an electrophoretic gel.
In one aspect, the cloning involves a vector and two fragments. The vector contains a positive selection marker, preferably Neor, and cloning sites on each side of the positive selection marker for two different regions of the target gene. Optionally, the vector also contains a sequence coding for a screening marker (reporter gene), preferably, positioned opposite the positive selection marker. The screening marker will be positioned outside the flanking regions of homologous sequences. Figure 3A shows one embodiment of the vector with the screening marker, GFP, positioned on one side of the vector. However, the screening marker can be positioned anywhere between Not I and Site 4 on the side opposite the positive selection marker, Neor.
One example of a suitable vector is the plasmid vector shown in Figure 2 having the sequence of SEQ ED NO: l. The specific nucleic acid ligation-independent cloning sites (also referred to herein as annealing sites) labeled "sites 1, 2, 3 or 4" in Figure 1 are also shown herein. Generally, the cloning sites are lacking at least one type of base, i.e., thymine (T), guanine (G), cytosine (C) or adenine (A). Accordingly, reacting the vector with an enzyme that acts as both a polymerase and exonuclease in presence of only the one missing nucleotide will create an overhang. For example, T4 DNA polymerase acts as both a 3 '-5' exonuclease and a polymerase. Thus, when there are insufficient nucleotides available for the polymerase activity, T4 will act as an exonuclease. Specific overhangs can therefore be created by reacting the pDG2 vector with T4 DNA polymerase in the presence of dTTP only. Other enzymes useful in the practice of this invention will be known to those in the art, for instance uracil DNA glycosylase (UDG) (See, e.g., WO 93/18175). The vector exemplified herein has an overhand of 24 nucleotides. It will be known by those skilled in the art that as few as 5 nucleotides are required for successful ligation independent cloning. In another embodiment, a construct is assembled in a two-step cloning protocol. In the first step, each cloning region of homology is separately cloned into two of the annealing sites of the vector. For example, an "upstream" region of homology is cloned into annealing sites 1 and 2 while a separate cloning, a "downstream" region of homology is cloned into annealing sites 3 and 4. Once clones containing each single region of homology are identified, a targeting construct containing both regions of homology can be created by digesting each clone with restriction enzymes where one enzyme digests outside of annealing site 1 (e.g., Not I in Figure 2A) and another enzyme digests between the positive selection marker and annealing site 3 (e.g., Sal I in Figure 2A). The fragments containing the flanking homology regions from each construct will be purified (e.g., by gel electrophoresis) and combined using standard ligation techniques known in the art, to produce the resulting targeting construct.
In yet another embodiment, a construct according to one aspect of the present invention can be formed in a single-step, four-way ligation procedure. The vector and fragments are treated as described above. Briefly, the vector is treated to form two pieces, each piece having a single-stranded tail of specific sequence on each end. Likewise, the PCR-amplified flanking fragments are also treated to form single-stranded tails complementary to those of the vector pieces. The treated vector pieces and fragments are combined and allowed to anneal as described above. Because of the specificity of the single- stranded tails, the final construct will contain the fragments separated by the positive selection marker in the proper orientation.
The final plasmid constructs are amplified in bacteria, purified and can then be introduced into ES cells, or stored frozen at -20°C until use. Where so desired, the vector is introduced into an embryonic stem cell line (e.g., by electroporation) and cells in which the introduced DNA has homologously recombined with the endogenous DNA are selected (see e.g., Li, et al., Cell, 69:91526 (1992)). Successful recombination may be verified using various techniques known in the art, such as PCR and/or Southern analysis. Typically, several hundred individual colonies are selected following drug selection in G418 (for Neo cassettes), expanded for DNA preparation and screened for homologous recombination by PCR analysis. The PCR screening procedure uses a target gene specific oligonucleotide that is not present on the targeting vector and an oligonucleotide corresponding to the Neo (or other selectable marker) cassette. The selection of oligonucleotides outside the targeting vector is used to differentiate homologous recombinants from random integrations of the targeting vector. In general, four independent target gene specific oligonucleotides not present on the targeting vector are tested on wild type ES cell DNA in combination with target gene specific oligonucleotides that are adjacent to the insertion site of the Neo (Figure 9). Oligonucleotides producing background bands or failing to give the predicted size product are eliminated. A single target gene specific oligonucleotide is selected and paired with an oligonucleotide corresponding to the Neo cassette. ES cells that are PCR positive in this screen are confirmed by a second PCR experiment that utilizes a different pair of target gene specific and Neo gene (or other selectable marker) specific oligonucleotides that are adjacent to, but distinct from, the original oligonucleotide pair. In addition, this protocol may be repeated using oligonucleotides specific for target gene sequences located on the opposite side of the selectable marker in conjunction with a marker specific oligonucleotide. In this way proper integration of both homologous sequences of the targeting vector is verified.
Southern blot hybridization may also be used to confirm the ES cell targeting event using a probe that is not contained on the targeting vector but is adjacent to the predicted crossover site of homologous recombination. Southern blot experiments testing for homologous recombination should detect two distinct bands representing the wild type chromosome and mutant gene targeted allele. High molecular weight genomic DNA is prepared from control ES cell parental lines and ES cell lines that are PCR positive for homologous recombination. The DNA is digested with a restriction enzyme (EcoRl) that has been demonstrated by restriction mapping to not cut the targeting vector within the arm of the target gene DNA homology and to be diagnostic of homologous recombination. As an
EcoRl site is present in the Neo gene, a homologous recombination event should result in the insertion of the Neo cassette and the addition of the EcoRl site. The addition of this site is predicted to result in an overall reduction in size of the band hybridizing to the probe. The digested DNA is separated on a 1 % TAE Agarose gel, transferred to a nylon membrane, crosslinked with a UV light (StrataLinker) and hybridized with a 32-P labeled DNA probe. This probe does not hybridize to DNA sequences that are on the targeting vector but to a position that is adjacent to the site of homologous integration.
Selected cells are then injected into a blastocyst (or other stage of development suitable for the purposes of creating a viable animal, such as, for example, a morula) of an animal (e.g., a mouse) to form chimeras (see e.g., Bradley, A. in Teratocarcinomas and
Embryonic Stem Cells: A Practical Approach, E. J. Robertson, ed., ERL, Oxford, pp. 113-152 (1987)). Alternatively, selected ES cells can be allowed to aggregate with dissociated mouse embryo cells to form the aggregation chimera. A chimeric embryo can then be implanted into a suitable pseudopregnant female foster animal and the embryo brought to term. Chimeric progeny harbouring the homologously recombined DNA in their germ cells can be used to breed animals in which all cells of the animal contain the homologously recombined DNA. In one embodiment, chimeric progeny mice are used to generate a mouse with a heterozygous disruption in the target gene. Heterozygous knockout mice can then be mated. It is well know in the art that typically VΛ of the offspring of such matings will have a homozygous disruption in the target gene.
The heterozygous and homozygous knockout mice can then be compared to normal, wild type mice to determine whether disruption of the target gene causes phenotypic changes, especially pathological changes. For example, heterozygous and homozygous mice may be evaluated for phenotypic changes by physical examination, necropsy, histology, clinical chemistry, complete blood count, body weight, organ weights, and cytological evaluation of bone marrow.
In one embodiment, the phenotype (or phenotypic change) associated with a disruption in the target gene is placed into or stored in a database. Preferably, the database includes: (i) genotypic data (e.g., identification of the disrupted gene) and (ii) phenotypic data (e.g., phenotype(s) resulting from the gene disruption) associated with the genotypic data. The database is preferably electronic. In addition, the database is preferably combined with a search tool so that the database is searchable.
The present invention further contemplates conditional knockout animals, such as those produced using recombination methods. Bacteriophage PI Cre recombinase and flp recombinase from yeast plasmids are two non-limiting examples of site-specific DNA recombinase enzymes which cleave DNA at specific target sites (lox P sites for cre recombinase and frt sites for flp recombinase) and catalyze a ligation of this DNA to a second cleaved site. A large number of suitable alternative site-specific recombinases have been described, and their genes can be used in accordance with the method of the present invention. Such recombinases include the Int recombinase of bacteriophage λ (with or without Xis) (Weisberg, R. et. al., in Lambda II, (Hendrix, R., et al, Eds.), Cold Spring Harbor Press, Cold Spring Harbor, NY, pp. 211-50 (1983), herein incorporated by reference); Tpnl and the β-lactamase transposons (Mercier, et al, J. Bacteriol., 172:3745-57 (1990)); the Tn3 resolvase (Flanagan & Fennewald J. Molec. Biol, 206:295-304 (1989); Stark, et al,
Cell, 58:779-90 (1989)); the yeast recombinases (Matsuzaki, et al, J. Bacteriol, 172:610-18 (1990)); the β. subtilis SpolVC recombinase (Sato, et al, J. Bacteriol. 172: 1092-98 (1990)); the Flp recombinase (Schwartz & Sadowski, J. Molec. Biol, 205:647-658 (1989); Parsons, et al, J. Biol. Chem., 265:4527-33 (1990); Golic & Lindquist, Cell, 59:499-509 (1989); Amin, et al, J. Molec. Biol, 214:55-72 (1990)); the Hin recombinase (Glasgow, et al, J. Biol. Chem., 264: 10072-82 (1989)); immunoglobulin recombinases (Malynn, et al, Cell, 54:453-460 (1988)); and the Cin recombinase (Haffter & Bickle, EMBO J., 7:3991-3996 (1988); Hubner, et al, J. Molec. Biol, 205:493-500 (1989)), all herein incorporated by reference. Such systems are discussed by Echols (J. Biol. Chem. 265: 14697-14700 (1990)); de Villartay (Nature, 335: 170-74 (1988)); Craig, (Ann. Rev. Genet., 22:77-105 (1988)); Poyart-Salmeron, et al, (EMBO J. 8:2425-33 (1989)); Hunger-Bertling, et al. (Mol Cell. Biochem., 92: 107- 16 (1990)); and Cregg & Madden (Mol. Gen. Genet., 219:320-23 (1989)), all herein incoiporated by reference.
Cre has been purified to homogeneity, and its reaction with the loxP site has been extensively characterized (Abremski & Hess J. Mol. Biol. 259: 1509- 14 (1984), herein incorporated by reference). Cre protein has a molecular weight of 35,000 and can be obtained commercially from New England Nuclear/Du Pont. The cre gene (which encodes the Cre protein) has been cloned and expressed (Abremski, et al. Cell 32: 1301-11 (1983), herein incorporated by reference). The Cre protein mediates recombination between two loxP sequences (Steinberg, et al. Cold Spring Harbor Symp. Quant. Biol. 45:297-309 (1981)), which may be present on the same or different DNA molecule. Because the internal spacer sequence of the loxP site is asymmetrical, two loxP sites can exhibit directionality relative to one another (Hoess & Abremski Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 81: 1026-29 (1984)). Thus, when two sites on the same DNA molecule are in a directly repeated orientation, Cre will excise the DNA between the sites (Abremski, et al. Cell 32: 1301-11 (1983)). However, if the sites are inverted with respect to each other, the DNA between them is not excised after recombination but is simply inverted. Thus, a circular DNA molecule having two loxP sites in direct orientation will recombine to produce two smaller circles, whereas circular molecules having two loxP sites in an inverted orientation simply invert the DNA sequences flanked by the loxP sites. In addition, recombinase action can result in reciprocal exchange of regions distal to the target site when targets are present on separate DNA molecules. Recombinases have important application for characterizing gene function in knockout models. When the constructs described herein are used to disrupt target genes, a fusion transcript can be produced when insertion of the positive selection marker occurs downstream (3) of the translation initiation site of the target gene. The fusion transcript could result in some level of protein expression with unknown consequence. It has been suggested that insertion of a positive selection marker gene can affect the expression of nearby genes. These effects may make it difficult to determine gene function after a knockout event since one could not discern whether a given phenotype is associated with the inactivation of a gene, or the transcription of nearby genes. Both potential problems are solved by exploiting recombinase activity. When the positive selection marker is flanked by recombinase sites in the same orientation, the addition of the corresponding recombinase will result in the removal of the positive selection marker. In this way, effects caused by the positive selection marker or expression of fusion transcripts are avoided. In one embodiment, purified recombinase enzyme is provided to the cell by direct microinjection. In another embodiment, recombinase is expressed from a co-transfected construct or vector in which the recombinase gene is operably linked to a functional promoter. An additional aspect of this embodiment is the use of tissue-specific or inducible recombinase constructs which allow the choice of when and where recombination occurs. One method for practicing the inducible forms of recombinase-mediated recombination involves the use of vectors that use inducible or tissue-specific promoters or other gene regulatory elements to express the desired recombinase activity. The inducible expression elements are preferably operatively positioned to allow the inducible control or activation of expression of the desired recombinase activity. Examples of such inducible promoters or other gene regulatory elements include, but are not limited to, tetracycline, metallothionine, ecdysone, and other steroid-responsive promoters, rapamycin responsive promoters, and the like (No, et al. Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 93:3346-51 (1996); Furth, et al. Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 91:9302-6 (1994)). Additional control elements that can be used include promoters requiring specific transcription factors such as viral, promoters. Vectors incorporating such promoters would only express recombinase activity in cells that express the necessary transcription factors.
Other methods known in the art may be used to produce the transgenic cells and knockout mice of the present invention. For example, the methods described in U.S. Patent No. 5,464,764; U.S. Patent No. 5,487,992; U.S. Patent No. 5,627,059; and U.S. Patent No. 5,631,153 may be used to produce a transgenic cell or knockout mice comprising a disruption in a target gene as provided by the present invention.
Models for Disease
The cell- and animal-based systems described herein can be utilized as models for diseases. Animals of any species, including, but not limited to, mice, rats, rabbits, guinea pigs, pigs, micro-pigs, goats, and non-human primates, e.g., baboons, monkeys, and chimpanzees may be used to generate disease animal models. In addition, cells from humans may be used. These systems may be used in a variety of applications. For example, the cell- and animal-based model systems may be used to further characterize a target gene. Such assays may be utilized as part of screening strategies designed to identify compounds which are capable of ameliorating disease symptoms. Thus, the animal- and cell-based models may be used to identify drugs, pharmaceuticals, therapies and interventions which may be effective in treating disease. Cell-based systems may be used to identify compounds which may act to ameliorate disease symptoms. For example, such cell systems may be exposed to a compound suspected of exhibiting an ability to ameliorate disease symptoms, at a sufficient concentration and for a time sufficient to elicit such an amelioration of disease symptoms in the exposed cells. After exposure, the cells are examined to determine whether one or more of the disease cellular phenotypes has been altered to resemble a more normal or more wild type, non-disease phenotype.
In addition, animal-based disease systems, such as those described herein, may be used to identify compounds capable of ameliorating disease symptoms. Such animal models may be used as test substrates for the identification of drugs, pharmaceuticals, therapies, and interventions which may be effective in treating a disease or other phenotypic characteristic of the animal. For example, animal models may be exposed to a compound or agent suspected of exhibiting an ability to ameliorate disease symptoms, at a sufficient concentration and for a time sufficient to elicit such an amelioration of disease symptoms in the exposed animals. The response of the animals to the exposure may be monitored by assessing the reversal of disorders associated with the disease. Exposure may involve treating mother animals during gestation of the model animals described herein, thereby exposing embryos or fetuses to the compound or agent which may prevent or ameliorate the disease or phenotype. Neonatal, juvenile, and adult animals can also be exposed.
More particularly, using the animal models of the invention, methods of identifying agents and/or compounds are provided, preferably, on the basis of the ability of the agents and/or compounds to affect physiological, histological or behavioral phenotypes associated with a disruption in a gene that encodes a target gene.
In one embodiment, the present invention provides a method of identifying agents having the ability to modulate a target gene's expression or function. The method includes administering an effective amount of the agent to the non-human transgenic animal of the present invention, preferably a mouse, having a disruption in a target gene. The method includes measuring a response of the animal, for example, to the agent, and comparing the response of such animal to a control animal. A "physiological response" is any biological or physical parameter of an animal which can be measured. Molecular assays (e.g., gene transcription, protein production and degradation rates), physical parameters (e.g., exercise physiology tests, measurement of various parameters of respiration, measurement of heart rate or blood pressure, measurement of bleeding time, aPTT.T, or TT), and cellular assays (e.g,. immunohistochemical assays of cell surface markers, or the ability of cells to aggregate or proliferate) can be used to assess a physiological response.
The animals and cells of the present invention may by utilized as models for diseases, disorders, or conditions associated with phenotypes relating to a disruption in a target gene. The present invention also provides a unique animal model for testing and developing new treatments relating to the behavioral phenotypes. Analysis of the behavioral phenotype allows for the development of an animal model useful for testing, for instance, the efficacy of proposed genetic and pharmacological therapies for human genetic diseases, such as neurological, neuropsychological, or psychotic illnesses.
A statistical analysis of the various behaviors measured can be carried out using any conventional statistical program routinely used by those skilled in the art (such as, for example, "Analysis of Variance" or ANOVA). A "p" value of about 0.05 or less is generally considered to be statistically significant, although slightly higher p values may still be indicative of statistically significant differences. To statistically analyze abnormal behavior, a comparison is made between the behavior of a transgenic animal (or a group thereof) to the behavior of a wild-type mouse (or a group thereof), typically under certain prescribed conditions. "Abnormal behavior" as used herein refers to behavior exhibited by an animal having a disruption in the target gene, e.g. transgenic animal, which differs from an animal without a disruption in the target gene, e.g. wild-type mouse. Abnormal behavior consists of any number of standard behaviors that can be objectively measured (or observed) and compared. In the case of comparison, it is preferred that the change be statistically significant to confirm that there is indeed a meaningful behavioral difference between the knockout animal and the wild-type control animal. Examples of behaviors which may be measured or observed include, but are not limited to, ataxia, rapid limb movement, eye movement, breathing, motor activity, cognition, emotional behaviors, social behaviors, hyperactivity, hypersensitivity, anxiety, impaired learning, abnormal reward behavior, and abnormal social interaction, such as aggression
A series of tests may be used to measure the behavioral phenotype of the animal models of the present invention, including neurological and neuropsychological tests to identify abnormal behavior. These tests may be used to measure abnormal behavior relating to, for example, learning and memory, eating, pain, aggression, sexual reproduction, anxiety, depression, schizophrenia, and drug abuse. (See, e.g., Crawley and Paylor, Hormones and Behavior 31 : 197-211 (1997)). The social interaction test involves exposing a mouse to other animals in a variety of settings. The social behaviors of the animals (e.g., touching, climbing, sniffing, and mating) are subsequently evaluated. Differences in behaviors can then be statistically analyzed and compared (See, e.g., S. E. File, et al, Pharmacol. Bioch. Behav. 22:941-944 (1985); R. R. Holson, Phys. Behav. 37:239-247 (1986)). Examplary behavioral tests include the following. The mouse startle response test typically involves exposing the animal to a sensory
(typically auditory) stimulus and measuring the startle response of the animal (see, e.g. , M. A. Geyer, et al, Brain Res. Bull 25:485-498 (1990); Paylor and Crawley, Psychopharmacology 132: 169- 180 (1997)). A pre-pulse inhibition test can also be used, in which the percent inhibition (from a normal startle response) is measured by "cueing" the animal first with a brief low-intensity pre-pulse prior to the startle pulse.
The electric shock test generally involves exposure to an electrified surface and measurement of subsequent behaviors such as, for example, motor activity, learning, social behaviors. The behaviors are measured and statistically analyzed using standard statistical tests. (See, e.g., G. J. Kant, et al, Pharm. Bioch. Behav. 20:793-797 (1984); N. J. Leidenheimer, et al., Pharmacol Bioch. Behav. 30:351-355 (1988)).
The tail-pinch or immobilization test involves applying pressure to the tail of the animal and/or restraining the animal's movements. Motor activity, social behavior, and cognitive behavior are examples of the areas that are measured. (See, e.g., M. Bertolucci D'Angic, et al, Neurochem. 55: 1208-1214 (1990)). The novelty test generally comprises exposure to a novel environment and/or novel objects. The animal's motor behavior in the novel environment and/or around the novel object are measured and statistically analyzed. (See, e.g., D. K. Reinstein, et al., Pharm. Bioch. Behav. 17: 193-202 ( 1982); B. Poucet, Behav. NeuroscL 103: 1009-10016 (1989); R. R. Holson, et al., Phys. Behav. 37:231 -238 (1986)). This test may be used to detect visual processing deficiencies or defects.
The learned helplessness test involves exposure to stresses, for example, noxious stimuli, which cannot be affected by the animal's behavior. The animal's behavior can be statistically analyzed using various standard statistical tests. (See, e.g., A. Leshner, et al., Behav. Neural Biol 26:497-501 ( 1979)). Alternatively, a tail suspension test may be used, in which the "immobile" time of the mouse is measured when suspended "upside-down" by its tail. This is a measure of whether the animal struggles, an indicator of depression. In humans, depression is believed to result from feelings of a lack of control over one's life or situation. It is believed that a depressive state can be elicited in animals by repeatedly subjecting them to aversive situations over which they have no control. A condition of "learned helplessness" is eventually reached, in which the animal will stop trying to change its circumstances and simply accept its fate. Animals that stop struggling sooner are believed to be more prone to depression. Studies have shown that the administration of certain antidepressant drugs prior to testing increases the amount of time that animals struggle before giving up.
The Morris water-maze test comprises learning spatial orientations in water and subsequently measuring the animal's behaviors, such as, for example, by counting the number of incorrect choices. The behaviors measured are statistically analyzed using standard statistical tests. (See, e.g., E. M. Spruijt, et al, Brain Res. 527: 192-197 (1990)). Alternatively, a Y-shaped maze may be used (see, e.g., McFarland, D.J.,
Pharmacology, Biochemistry and Behavior 32:723-726 (1989); Dellu, F., et al., Neurobiology of Learning and Memory 73:31-48 (2000)). The Y-maze is generally believed to be a test of cognitive ability. The dimensions of each arm of the Y-maze can be, for example, approximately 40 cm x 8 cm x 20 cm, although other dimensions may be used. Each arm can also have, for example, sixteen equally spaced photobeams to automatically detect movement within the arms. At least two different tests can be performed using such a Y-maze. In a continuous Y-maze paradigm, mice are allowed to explore all three arms of a Y-maze for, e.g., approximately 10 minutes. The animals are continuously tracked using photobeam detection grids, and the data can be used to measure spontaneous alteration and positive bias behavior. Spontaneous alteration refers to the natural tendency of a "normal" animal to visit the least familiar arm of a maze. An alternation is scored when the animal makes two consecutive turns in the same direction, thus representing a sequence of visits to the least recently entered arm of the maze. Position bias determines egocentrically defined responses by measuring the animal's tendency to favor turning in one direction over another. Therefore, the test can detect differences in an animal's ability to navigate on the basis of allocentric or egocentric mechanisms. The two-trial Y-maze memory test measures response to novelty and spatial memory based on a free-choice exploration paradigm. During the first trial (acquisition), the animals are allowed to freely visit two arms of the Y-maze for, e.g., approximately 15 minutes. The third arm is blocked off during this trial. The second trial (retrieval) is performed after an intertrial interval of, e.g., approximately 2 hours. During the retrieval trial, the blocked arm is opened and the animal is allowed access to all three arms for, e.g., approximately 5 minutes. Data are collected during the retrieval trial and analyzed for the number and duration of visits to each arm. Because the three arms of the maze are virtually identical, discrimination between novelty and familiarity is dependent on
"environmental" spatial cues around the room relative to the position of each arm. Changes in arm entry and duration of time spent in the novel arm in a transgenic animal model may be indicative of a role of that gene in mediating novelty and recognition processes.
The passive avoidance or shuttle box test generally involves exposure to two or more environments, one of which is noxious, providing a choice to be learned by the animal. Behavioral measures include, for example, response latency, number of correct responses, and consistency of response. (See, e.g., R. Ader, et al., Psychon. Sci. 26: 125- 128 (1972); R. R. Holson, Phys. Behav. 37:221-230 (1986)). Alternatively, a zero-maze can be used. In a zero-maze, the animals can, for example, be placed in a closed quadrant of an elevated annular platform having, e.g., 2 open and 2 closed quadrants, and are allowed to explore for approximately 5 minutes. This paradigm exploits an approach-avoidance conflict between normal exploratory activity and an aversion to open spaces in rodents. This test measures anxiety levels and can be used to evaluate the effectiveness of anti-anxiolytic drugs. The time spent in open quadrants versus closed quadrants may be recorded automatically, with, for example, the placement of photobeams at each transition site.
The food avoidance test involves exposure to novel food and objectively measuring, for example, food intake and intake latency. The behaviors measured are statistically analyzed using standard statistical tests. (See, e.g. , B. A. Campbell, et al., J. Comp. Physiol Psychol. 67: 15-22 (1969)). The elevated plus-maze test comprises exposure to a maze, without sides, on a platform, the animal's behavior is objectively measured by counting the number of maze entries and maze learning. The behavior is statistically analyzed using standard statistical tests. (See, e.g. , H. A. Baldwin, et al, Brain Res. Bull, 20:603-606 (1988)).
The stimulant-induced hyperactivity test involves injection of stimulant drugs (e.g., amphetamines, cocaine, PCP, and the like), and objectively measuring, for example, motor activity, social interactions, cognitive behavior. The animal's behaviors are statistically analyzed using standard statistical tests. (See, e.g., P. B. S. Clarke, et al, Psychopharmacology 96:51 1 -520 (1988); P. Kuczenski, et al, J. Neuroscience 1 1 :2703-2712 (1991)). The self-stimulation test generally comprises providing the mouse with the opportunity to regulate electrical and/or chemical stimuli to its own brain. Behavior is measured by frequency and pattern of self-stimulation. Such behaviors are statistically analyzed using standard statistical tests. (See, e.g., S. Nassif, et al., Brain Res., 332:247-257 (1985); W. L. Isaac, et al, Behav. Neurosci. 103:345-355 (1989)).
The reward test involves shaping a variety of behaviors, e.g., motor, cognitive, and social, measuring, for example, rapidity and reliability of behavioral change, and statistically analyzing the behaviors measured. (See, e.g., L. E. Jarrard, et al., Exp. Brain Res. 61:519-530 (1986)).
The DRL (differential reinforcement to low rates of responding) performance test involves exposure to intermittent reward paradigms and measuring the number of proper responses, e.g., lever pressing. Such behavior is statistically analyzed using standard statistical tests. (See, e.g., J. D. Sinden, et al., Behav. Neurosci. 100:320-329 (1986); V. Nalwa, et al., Behav Brain Res. 17:73-76 (1985); and A. J. Nonneman, et al., J. Comp. Physiol. Psych. 95:588-602 (1981)).
The spatial learning test involves exposure to a complex novel environment, measuring the rapidity and extent of spatial learning, and statistically analyzing the behaviors measured. (See, e.g., N. Pitsikas, et al., Pharm. Bioch. Behav. 38:931-934 (1991); B. poucet, et al., Brain Res. 37:269-280 (1990); D. Christie, et al., Brain Res. 37:263-268 (1990); and F. Van Haaren, et al., Behav. Neurosci. 102:481-488 (1988)). Alternatively, an open-field (of) test may be used, in which the greater distance traveled for a given amount of time is a measure of the activity level and anxiety of the animal. When the open field is a novel environment, it is believed that an approach-avoidance situation is created, in which the animal is "torn" between the drive to explore and the drive to protect itself. Because the chamber is lighted and has no places to hide other than the corners, it is expected that a "normal" mouse will spend more time in the corners and around the periphery than it will in the center where there is no place to hide. "Normal" mice will, however, venture into the central regions as they explore more and more of the chamber. It can then be extrapolated that especially anxious mice will spend most of their time in the corners, with relatively little or no exploration of the central region, whereas bold (i.e., less anxious) mice will travel a greater distance, showing little preference for the periphery versus the central region.
The visual, somatosensory and auditory neglect tests generally comprise exposure to a sensory stimulus, objectively measuring, for example, orientating responses, and statistically analyzing the behaviors measured. (See, e.g., J. M. Vargo, et al., Exp. Neurol. 102: 199-209 (1988)).
The consummatory behavior test generally comprises feeding and drinking, and objectively measuring quantity of consumption. The behavior measured is statistically analyzed using standard statistical tests. (See, e.g., P. J. Fletcher, et al., Psychopharmacol. 102:301-308 (1990); M. G. Corda, et al.„ Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. USA 80:2072-2076 (1983)).
A visual discrimination test can also be used to evaluate the visual processing of an animal. One or two similar objects are placed in an open field and the animal is allowed to explore for about 5-10 minutes. The time spent exploring each object (proximity to, i.e., movement within, e.g., about 3-5 cm of the object is considered exploration of an object) is recorded. The animal is then removed from the open field, and the objects are replaced by a similar object and a novel object. The animal is returned to the open field and the percent time spent exploring the novel object over the old object is measured (again, over about a 5- 10 minute span). "Normal" animals will typically spend a higher percentage of time exploring the novel object rather than the old object. If a delay is imposed between sampling and testing, the memory task becomes more hippocampal-dependent. If no delay is imposed, the task is more based on simple visual discrimination. This test can also be used for olfactory discrimination, in which the objects (preferably, simple blocks) can be sprayed or otherwise treated to hold an odor. This test can also be used to determine if the animal can make gustatory discriminations; animals that return to the previously eaten food instead of novel food exhibit gustatory neophobia.
A hot plate analgesia test can be used to evaluate an animal's sensitivity to heat or painful stimuli. For example, a mouse can be placed on an approximately 55°C hot plate and the mouse's response latency (e.g., time to pick up and lick a hind paw) can be recorded. These responses are not reflexes, but rather "higher" responses requiring cortical involvement. This test may be used to evaluate a nociceptive disorder.
An accelerating rotarod test may be used to measure coordination and balance in mice. Animals can be, for example, placed on a rod that acts like a rotating treadmill (or rolling log). The rotarod can be made to rotate slowly at first and then progressively faster until it reaches a speed of, e.g., approximately 60 rpm. The mice must continually reposition themselves in order to avoid falling off. The animals are preferably tested in at least three trials, a minimum of 20 minutes apart. Those mice that are able to stay on the rod the longest are believed to have better coordination and balance.
A metrazol administration test can be used to screen animals for varying susceptibilities to seizures or similar events. For example, a 5mg/ml solution of metrazol can be infused through the tail vein of a mouse at a rate of, e.g., approximately 0.375 ml/min. The infusion will cause all mice to experience seizures, followed by death. Those mice that enter the seizure stage the soonest are believed to be more prone to seizures. Four distinct physiological stages can be recorded: soon after the start of infusion, the mice will exhibit a noticeable "twitch", followed by a series of seizures, ending in a final tensing of the body known as "tonic extension", which is followed by death.
Target Gene Products The present invention further contemplates use of the target gene sequence to produce target gene products. Target gene products may include proteins that represent functionally equivalent gene products. Such an equivalent gene product may contain deletions, additions or substitutions of amino acid residues within the amino acid sequence encoded by the gene sequences described herein, but which result in a silent change, thus producing a functionally equivalent target gene product. Amino acid substitutions may be made on the basis of similarity in polarity, charge, solubility, hydrophobicity, hydrophilicity, and/or the amphipathic nature of the residues involved.
For example, nonpolar (hydrophobic) amino acids include alanine, leucine, isoleucine, valine, proline, phenylalanine, tryptophan, and methionine; polar neutral amino acids include glycine, serine, threonine, cysteine, tyrosine, asparagine, and glutamine; positively charged (basic) amino acids include arginine, lysine, and histidine; and negatively charged (acidic) amino acids include aspartic acid and glutamic acid. "Functionally equivalent", as utilized herein, refers to a protein capable of exhibiting a substantially similar in vivo activity as the endogenous gene products encoded by the target gene sequences. Alternatively, when utilized as part of an assay, "functionally equivalent" may refer to peptides capable of interacting with other cellular or extracellular molecules in a manner substantially similar to the way in which the corresponding portion of the endogenous gene product would.
Other protein products useful according to the methods of the invention are peptides derived from or based on the target gene produced by recombinant or synthetic means (derived peptides).
Target gene products may be produced by recombinant DNA technology using techniques well known in the art. Thus, methods for preparing the gene polypeptides and peptides of the invention by expressing nucleic acid encoding gene sequences are described herein. Methods which are well known to those skilled in the art can be used to construct expression vectors containing gene protein coding sequences and appropriate transcriptional/translational control signals. These methods include, for example, in vitro recombinant DNA techniques, synthetic techniques and in vivo recombination/genetic recombination (see, e.g., Sambrook, et al., 1989, supra, and Ausubel, et al., 1989, supra). Alternatively, RNA capable of encoding gene protein sequences may be chemically synthesized using, for example, automated synthesizers (see, e.g. Oligonucleotide Synthesis: A Practical Approach, Gait, M. J. ed., IRL Press, Oxford (1984)).
A variety of host-expression vector systems may be utilized to express the gene coding sequences of the invention. Such host-expression systems represent vehicles by which the coding sequences of interest may be produced and subsequently purified, but also represent cells which may, when transformed or transfected with the appropriate nucleotide coding sequences, exhibit the gene protein of the invention in situ. These include but are not limited to microorganisms such as bacteria (e.g., E. coli, B. subtilis) transformed with recombinant bacteriophage DNA, plasmid DNA or cosmid DNA expression vectors containing gene protein coding sequences; yeast (e.g. Saccharomyces, Pichia) transformed with recombinant yeast expression vectors containing the gene protein coding sequences; insect cell systems infected with recombinant virus expression vectors (e.g., baculovirus) containing the gene protein coding sequences; plant cell systems infected with recombinant virus expression vectors (e.g., cauliflower mosaic virus, CaMV; tobacco mosaic virus, TMV) or transformed with recombinant plasmid expression vectors (e.g., Ti plasmid) containing gene protein coding sequences; or mammalian cell systems (e.g. COS, CHO, BHK, 293, 3T3) harboring recombinant expression constructs containing promoters derived from the genome of mammalian cells (e.g., metallothionein promoter) or from mammalian viruses (e.g., the adenovirus late promoter; the vaccinia virus 7.5 K promoter).
In bacterial systems, a number of expression vectors may be advantageously selected depending upon the use intended for the gene protein being expressed. For example, when a large quantity of such a protein is to be produced, for the generation of antibodies or to screen peptide libraries, for example, vectors which direct the expression of high levels of fusion protein products that are readily purified may be desirable. Such vectors include, but are not limited, to the E. coli expression vector pUR278 (Ruther et al., EMBO J., 2: 1791-94 (1983)), in which the gene protein coding sequence may be ligated individually into the vector in frame with the lac Z coding region so that a fusion protein is produced; pIN vectors (Inouye & Inouye, Nucleic Acids Res., 13:3101-09 (1985); Van Heeke et al, J. Biol Chem., 264:5503-9 (1989)); and the like. pGEX vectors may also be used to express foreign polypeptides as fusion proteins with glutathione S-transferase (GST). Ln general, such fusion proteins are soluble and can easily be purified from lysed cells by adsorption to glutathione- agarose beads followed by elution in the presence of free glutathione. The pGEX vectors are designed to include thrombin or factor Xa protease cleavage sites so that the cloned target gene protein can be released from the GST moiety.
In a preferred embodiment, full length cDNA sequences are appended with in-frame Bam HI sites at the amino terminus and Eco RI sites at the carboxyl terminus using standard PCR methodologies (Innis, et al. (eds) PCR Protocols: A Guide to Methods and Applications, Academic Press, San Diego (1990)) and ligated into the pGEX-2TK vector (Pharmacia, Uppsala, Sweden). The resulting cDNA construct contains a kinase recognition site at the amino terminus for radioactive labeling and glutathione S-transferase sequences at the carboxyl terminus for affinity purification (Nilsson, et al., EMBO J., 4: 1075-80 (1985); Zabeau et al, EMBO J., 1 : 1217-24 (1982)). In an insect system, Autographa californica nuclear polyhedrosis virus (AcNPV) is used as a vector to express foreign genes. The virus grows in Spodoptera frugiperda cells. The gene coding sequence may be cloned individually into non-essential regions (for example the polyhedrin gene) of the virus and placed under control of an AcNPV promoter (for example the polyhedrin promoter). Successful insertion of gene coding sequence will result in inactivation of the polyhedrin gene and production of non-occluded recombinant virus (i.e., virus lacking the proteinaceous coat coded for by the polyhedrin gene). These recombinant viruses are then used to infect Spodoptera frugiperda cells in which the inserted gene is expressed (see, e.g., Smith, et al, J. Virol. 46: 584-93 (1983); U.S. Pat. No. 4,745,051). In mammalian host cells, a number of viral-based expression systems may be utilized.
In cases where an adenovirus is used as an expression vector, the gene coding sequence of interest may be ligated to an adenovirus transcription/translation control complex, e.g., the late promoter and tripartite leader sequence. This chimeric gene may then be inserted in the adenovirus genome by in vitro or in vivo recombination. Insertion in a non-essential region of the viral genome (e.g., region El or E3) will result in a recombinant virus that is viable and capable of expressing gene protein in infected hosts, (e.g., see Logan et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 81:3655-59 (1984)). Specific initiation signals may also be required for efficient translation of inserted gene coding sequences. These signals include the ATG initiation codon and adjacent sequences. In cases where an entire gene, including its own initiation codon and adjacent sequences, is inserted into the appropriate expression vector, no additional translational control signals may be needed. However, in cases where only a portion of the gene coding sequence is inserted, exogenous translational control signals, including, perhaps, the ATG initiation codon, must be provided. Furthermore, the initiation codon must be in phase with the reading frame of the desired coding sequence to ensure translation of the entire insert. These exogenous translational control signals and initiation codons can be of a variety of origins, both natural and synthetic. The efficiency of expression may be enhanced by the inclusion of appropriate transcription enhancer elements, transcription terminators, etc. (see Bitter, et al, Methods in EnzymoL, 153:516-44 (1987)). In addition, a host cell strain may be chosen which modulates the expression of the inserted sequences, or modifies and processes the gene product in the specific fashion desired. Such modifications (e.g., glycosylation) and processing (e.g., cleavage) of protein products may be important for the function of the protein. Different host cells have characteristic and specific mechanisms for the post-translational processing and modification of proteins. Appropriate cell lines or host systems can be chosen to ensure the correct modification and processing of the foreign protein expressed. To this end, eukaryotic host cells which possess the cellular machinery for proper processing of the primary transcript, glycosylation, and phosphorylation of the gene product may be used. Such mammalian host cells include but are not limited to CHO, VERO, BHK, HeLa, COS, MDCK, 293, 3T3, WI38, etc.
For long-term, high-yield production of recombinant proteins, stable expression is preferred. For example, cell lines which stably express the gene protein may be engineered. Rather than using expression vectors which contain viral origins of replication, host cells can be transformed with DNA controlled by appropriate expression control elements (e.g., promoter, enhancer, sequences, transcription terminators, polyadenylation sites, etc.), and a selectable marker. Following the introduction of the foreign DNA, engineered cells may be allowed to grow for 1-2 days in an enriched media, and then are switched to a selective media. The selectable marker in the recombinant plasmid confers resistance to the selection and allows cells which stably integrate the plasmid into their chromosomes and grow, to form foci which in turn can be cloned and expanded into cell lines. This method may advantageously be used to engineer cell lines which express the gene protein. Such engineered cell lines may be particularly useful in screening and evaluation of compounds that affect the endogenous activity of the gene protein.
In a preferred embodiment, control of timing and/or quantity of expression of the recombinant protein can be controlled using an inducible expression construct. Inducible constructs and systems for inducible expression of recombinant proteins will be well known to those skilled in the art. Examples of such inducible promoters or other gene regulatory elements include, but are not limited to, tetracycline, metallothionine, ecdysone, and other steroid-responsive promoters, rapamycin responsive promoters, and the like (No, et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 93:3346-51 (1996); Furth, et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 91:9302-6 (1994)). Additional control elements that can be used include promoters requiring specific transcription factors such as viral, particularly H V, promoters. In one in embodiment, a Tet inducible gene expression system is utilized. (Gossen et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 89:5547-51 (1992); Gossen, et al, Science, 268:1766-69 (1995)). Tet Expression Systems are based on two regulatory elements derived from the tetracycline-resistance operon of the E. coli TnlO transposon — the tetracycline repressor protein (TetR) and the tetracycline operator sequence (tetO) to which TetR binds. Using such a system, expression of the recombinant protein is placed under the control of the tetO operator sequence and transfected or transformed into a host cell. In the presence of TetR, which is co-transfected into the host cell, expression of the recombinant protein is repressed due to binding of the TetR protein to the tetO regulatory element. High-level, regulated gene expression can then be induced in response to varying concentrations of tetracycline (Tc) or Tc derivatives such as doxycycline (Dox), which compete with tetO elements for binding to TetR. Constructs and materials for tet inducible gene expression are available commercially from CLONTECH Laboratories, Inc., Palo Alto, CA.
When used as a component in an assay system, the gene protein may be labeled, either directly or indirectly, to facilitate detection of a complex formed between the gene protein and a test substance. Any of a variety of suitable labeling systems may be used including but not limited to radioisotopes such as 1251; enzyme labeling systems that generate a detectable caloπmetric signal or light when exposed to substrate; and fluorescent labels. Where recombinant DNA technology is used to produce the gene protein for such assay systems, it may be advantageous to engineer fusion proteins that can facilitate labeling, immobilization and/or detection. Indirect labeling involves the use of a protein, such as a labeled antibody, which specifically binds to the gene product. Such antibodies include but are not limited to polyclonal, monoclonal, chimeric, single chain, Fab fragments and fragments produced by a Fab expression library.
Production of Antibodies
Described herein are methods for the production of antibodies capable of specifically recognizing one or more epitopes. Such antibodies may include, but are not limited to polyclonal antibodies, monoclonal antibodies (mAbs), humanized or chimeric antibodies, single chain antibodies, Fab fragments, F(ab 2 fragments, fragments produced by a Fab expression library, anti-idiotypic (anti-Id) antibodies, and epitope-binding fragments of any of the above. Such antibodies may be used, for example, in the detection of a target gene in a biological sample, or, alternatively, as a method for the inhibition of abnormal target gene activity. Thus, such antibodies may be utilized as part of disease treatment methods, and/or may be used as part of diagnostic techniques whereby patients may be tested for abnormal levels of target gene proteins, or for the presence of abnormal forms of the such proteins.
For the production of antibodies, various host animals may be immunized by injection with the target gene, its expression product or a portion thereof. Such host animals may include but are not limited to rabbits, mice, and rats, to name but a few. Various adjuvants may be used to increase the immunological response, depending on the host species, including but not limited to Freund's (complete and incomplete), mineral gels such as aluminum hydroxide, surface active substances such as lysolecithin, pluronic polyols, polyanions, peptides, oil emulsions, keyhole limpet hemocyanin, dinitrophenol, and potentially useful human adjuvants such as BCG (bacille Calmette-Guerin) and Corynebacterium parvum.
Polyclonal antibodies are heterogeneous populations of antibody molecules derived from the sera of animals immunized with an antigen, such as target gene product, or an antigenic functional derivative thereof. For the production of polyclonal antibodies, host animals such as those described above, may be immunized by injection with gene product supplemented with adjuvants as also described above.
Monoclonal antibodies, which are homogeneous populations of antibodies to a particular antigen, may be obtained by any technique which provides for the production of antibody molecules by continuous cell lines in culture. These include, but are not limited to the hybridoma technique of Kohler and Milstein, Nature, 256:495-7 (1975); and U.S. Pat. No. 4,376,110), the human B-cell hybridoma technique (Kosbor, et al., Immunology Today, 4:72 (1983); Cote, et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 80:2026-30 (1983)), and the EBV- hybridoma technique (Cole, et al., in Monoclonal Antibodies And Cancer Therapy, Alan R. Liss, Inc., New York, pp. 77-96 (1985)). Such antibodies may be of any immunoglobulin class including IgG, IgM, IgE, IgA, IgD and any subclass thereof. The hybridoma producing the mAb of this invention may be cultivated in vitro or in vivo. Production of high titers of mAbs in vivo makes this the presently preferred method of production.
In addition, techniques developed for the production of "chimeric antibodies" (Morrison, et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci., 81 :6851-6855 (1984); Takeda, et al, Nature, 314:452-54 (1985)) by splicing the genes from a mouse antibody molecule of appropriate antigen specificity together with genes from a human antibody molecule of appropriate biological activity can be used. A chimeric antibody is a molecule in which different portions are derived from different animal species, such as those having a variable region derived from a murine mAb and a human immunoglobulin constant region. Alternatively, techniques described for the production of single chain antibodies (U.S.
Pat. No. 4,946,778; Bird, Science 242:423-26 (1988); Huston, et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 85:5879-83 (1988); and Ward, et al, Nature, 334:544-46 (1989)) can be adapted to produce gene-single chain antibodies. Single chain antibodies are formed by linking the heavy and light chain fragments of the Fv region via an amino acid bridge, resulting in a single chain polypeptide.
Antibody fragments which recognize specific epitopes may be generated by known techniques. For example, such fragments include but are not limited to: the F(ab')2 fragments which can be produced by pepsin digestion of the antibody molecule and the Fab fragments which can be generated by reducing the disulfide bridges of the F(ab)2 fragments. Alternatively, Fab expression libraries may be constructed (Huse, et al., Science, 246: 1275- 81 (1989)) to allow rapid and easy identification of monoclonal Fab fragments with the desired specificity.
Screening for Therapeutic Agents Cells that contain and express target gene sequences may be used to screen for therapeutic agents. Such cells may include non-recombinant monocyte cell lines, such as U937 (ATCC# CRL- 1593), THP-1 (ATCC# TIB-202), and P388D1 (ATCC# TIB-63); endothelial cells such as HUVEC's and bovine aortic endothelial cells (BAEC's); as well as generic mammalian cell lines such as HeLa cells and COS cells, e.g., COS-7 (ATCC# CRL- 1651). Further, such cells may include recombinant, transgenic cell lines. For example, the knockout mice of the invention may be used to generate cell lines, containing one or more cell types involved in a disease, that can be used as cell culture models for that disorder. While cells, tissues, and primary cultures derived from the disease transgenic animals of the invention may be utilized, the generation of continuous cell lines is preferred. For examples of techniques which may be used to derive a continuous cell line from the transgenic animals, see Small, et al, Mol. Cell Biol, 5:642-48 (1985).
Target gene sequences may be introduced into, and overexpressed in, the genome of the cell of interest. In order to overexpress a target gene sequence, the coding portion of the target gene sequence may be ligated to a regulatory sequence which is capable of driving gene expression in the cell type of interest. Such regulatory regions will be well known to those of skill in the art, and may be utilized in the absence of undue experimentation. Target gene sequences may also be disrupted or underexpressed. Cells having target gene disruptions or underexpressed target gene sequences may be used, for example, to screen for agents capable of affecting alternative pathways which compensate for any loss of function attributable to the disruption or underexpression.
In vitro systems may be designed to identify compounds capable of binding the target gene products. Such compounds may include, but are not limited to, peptides made of D- and/or L-configuration amino acids (in, for example, the form of random peptide libraries; see e.g., Lam, et al., Nature, 354:82-4 (1991)), phosphopeptides (in, for example, the form of random or partially degenerate, directed phosphopeptide libraries; see, e.g., Songyang, et al., Cell, 72:767-78 (1993)), antibodies, and small organic or inorganic molecules. Compounds identified may be useful, for example, in modulating the activity of target gene proteins, preferably mutant target gene proteins; elaborating the biological function of the target gene protein; or screening for compounds that disrupt normal target gene interactions or themselves disrupt such interactions.
The principle of the assays used to identify compounds that bind to the target gene protein involves preparing a reaction mixture of the target gene protein and the test compound under conditions and for a time sufficient to allow the two components to interact and bind, thus forming a complex which can be removed and/or detected in the reaction mixture. These assays can be conducted in a variety of ways. For example, one method to conduct such an assay would involve anchoring the target gene protein or the test substance onto a solid phase and detecting target protein/test substance complexes anchored on the solid phase at the end of the reaction. In one embodiment of such a method, the target gene protein may be anchored onto a solid surface, and the test compound, which is not anchored, may be labeled, either directly or indirectly.
In practice, microtitre plates are conveniently utilized. The anchored component may be immobilized by non-covalent or covalent attachments. Non-covalent attachment may be accomplished simply by coating the solid surface with a solution of the protein and drying. Alternatively, an immobilized antibody, preferably a monoclonal antibody, specific for the protein may be used to anchor the protein to the solid surface. The surfaces may be prepared in advance and stored. In order to conduct the assay, the nonimmobilized component is added to the coated surface containing the anchored component. After the reaction is complete, unreacted components are removed (e.g., by washing) under conditions such that any complexes formed will remain immobilized on the solid surface. The detection of complexes anchored on the solid surface can be accomplished in a number of ways. Where the previously nonimmobilized component is pre-labeled, the detection of label immobilized on the surface indicates that complexes were formed. Where the previously nonimmobilized component is not pre-labeled, an indirect label can be used to detect complexes anchored on the surface; e.g., using a labeled antibody specific for the previously nonimmobilized component (the antibody, in turn, may be directly labeled or indirectly labeled with a labeled anti-Ig antibody).
Alternatively, a reaction can be conducted in a liquid phase, the reaction products separated from unreacted components, and complexes detected; e.g., using an immobilized antibody specific for target gene product or the test compound to anchor any complexes formed in solution, and a labeled antibody specific for the other component of the possible complex to detect anchored complexes.
Compounds that are shown to bind to a particular target gene product through one of the methods described above can be further tested for their ability to elicit a biochemical response from the target gene protein. Agonists, antagonists and/or inhibitors of the expression product can be identified utilizing assays well known in the art.
Antisense, Ribozymes, and Antibodies
Other agents which may be used as therapeutics include the target gene, its expression product(s) and functional fragments thereof. Additionally, agents which reduce or inhibit mutant target gene activity may be used to ameliorate disease symptoms. Such agents include antisense, ribozyme, and triple helix molecules. Techniques for the production and use of such molecules are well known to those of skill in the art.
Anti-sense RNA and DNA molecules act to directly block the translation of mRNA by hybridizing to targeted mRNA and preventing protein translation. With respect to antisense DNA, oligodeoxyribonucleotides derived from the translation initiation site, e.g., between the -10 and +10 regions of the target gene nucleotide sequence of interest, are preferred.
Ribozymes are enzymatic RNA molecules capable of catalyzing the specific cleavage of RNA. The mechanism of ribozyme action involves sequence-specific hybridization of the ribozyme molecule to complementary target RNA, followed by an endonucleolytic cleavage. The composition of ribozyme molecules must include one or more sequences complementary to the target gene mRNA, and must include the well known catalytic sequence responsible for mRNA cleavage. For this sequence, see U.S. Pat. No. 5,093,246, which is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety. As such within the scope of the invention are engineered hammerhead motif ribozyme molecules that specifically and efficiently catalyze endonucleolytic cleavage of RNA sequences encoding target gene proteins.
Specific ribozyme cleavage sites within any potential RNA target are initially identified by scanning the molecule of interest for ribozyme cleavage sites which include the following sequences, GUA, GUU and GUC. Once identified, short RNA sequences of between 15 and 20 ribonucleotides corresponding to the region of the target gene containing the cleavage site may be evaluated for predicted structural features, such as secondary structure, that may render the oligonucleotide sequence unsuitable. The suitability of candidate sequences may also be evaluated by testing their accessibility to hybridization with complementary oligonucleotides, using ribonuclease protection assays. Nucleic acid molecules to be used in triple helix formation for the inhibition of transcription should be single stranded and composed of deoxyribonucleotides. The base composition of these oligonucleotides must be designed to promote triple helix formation via Hoogsteen base pairing rules, which generally require sizeable stretches of either purines or pyrimidines to be present on one strand of a duplex. Nucleotide sequences may be pyrimidine-based, which will result in TAT and CGC triplets across the three associated strands of the resulting triple helix. The pyrimidine-rich molecules provide base complementarity to a purine-rich region of a single strand of the duplex in a parallel orientation to that strand. In addition, nucleic acid molecules may be chosen that are purine- rich, for example, containing a stretch of G residues. These molecules will form a triple helix with a DNA duplex that is rich in GC pairs, in which the majority of the purine residues are located on a single strand of the targeted duplex, resulting in GGC triplets across the three strands in the triplex.
Alternatively, the potential sequences that can be targeted for triple helix formation may be increased by creating a so called "switchback" nucleic acid molecule. Switchback molecules are synthesized in an alternating 5 -3', 3'-5' manner, such that they base pair with first one strand of a duplex and then the other, eliminating the necessity for a sizeable stretch of either purines or pyrimidines to be present on one strand of a duplex. It is possible that the antisense, ribozyme, and/or triple helix molecules described herein may reduce or inhibit the transcription (triple helix) and/or translation (antisense, ribozyme) of mRNA produced by both normal and mutant target gene alleles. In order to ensure that substantially normal levels of target gene activity are maintained, nucleic acid molecules that encode and express target gene polypeptides exhibiting normal activity may be introduced into cells that do not contain sequences susceptible to whatever antisense, ribozyme, or triple helix treatments are being utilized. Alternatively, it may be preferable to coadminister normal target gene protein into the cell or tissue in order to maintain the requisite level of cellular or tissue target gene activity.
Anti-sense RNA and DNA, ribozyme, and triple helix molecules of the invention may be prepared by any method known in the art for the synthesis of DNA and RNA molecules. These include techniques for chemically synthesizing oligodeoxyribonucleotides and oligoribonucleotides well known in the art such as for example solid phase phosphoramidite chemical synthesis. Alternatively, RNA molecules may be generated by in vitro and in vivo transcription of DNA sequences encoding the antisense RNA molecule. Such DNA sequences may be incorporated into a wide variety of vectors which incorporate suitable RNA polymerase promoters such as the T7 or SP6 polymerase promoters. Alternatively, antisense cDNA constructs that synthesize antisense RNA constitutively or inducibly, depending on the promoter used, can be introduced stably into cell lines.
Various well-known modifications to the DNA molecules may be introduced as a means of increasing intracellular stability and half-life. Possible modifications include but are not limited to the addition of flanking sequences of ribonucleotides or deoxyribonucleotides to the 5' and/or 3' ends of the molecule or the use of phosphorothioate or 2' O-methyl rather than phosphodiesterase linkages within the oligodeoxyribonucleotide backbone. Antibodies that are both specific for target gene protein, and in particular, mutant gene protein, and interfere with its activity may be used to inhibit mutant target gene function. Such antibodies may be generated against the proteins themselves or against peptides corresponding to portions of the proteins using standard techniques known in the art and as also described herein. Such antibodies include but are not limited to polyclonal, monoclonal, Fab fragments, single chain antibodies, chimeric antibodies, etc.
In instances where the target gene protein is intracellular and whole antibodies are used, internalizing antibodies may be preferred. However, lipofectin liposomes may be used to deliver the antibody or a fragment of the Fab region which binds to the target gene epitope into cells. Where fragments of the antibody are used, the smallest inhibitory fragment which binds to the target or expanded target protein's binding domain is preferred. For example, peptides having an amino acid sequence corresponding to the domain of the variable region of the antibody that binds to the target gene protein may be used. Such peptides may be synthesized chemically or produced via recombinant DNA technology using methods well known in the art (see, e.g., Creighton, Proteins: Structures and Molecular Principles (1984) W.H. Freeman, New York 1983, supra; and Sambrook, et al., 1989, supra). Alternatively, single chain neutralizing antibodies which bind to intracellular target gene epitopes may also be administered. Such single chain antibodies may be administered, for example, by expressing nucleotide sequences encoding single-chain antibodies within the target cell population by utilizing, for example, techniques such as those described in Marasco, et al., Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. USA, 90:7889-93 (1993).
RNA sequences encoding target gene protein may be directly administered to a patient exhibiting disease symptoms, at a concentration sufficient to produce a level of target gene protein such that disease symptoms are ameliorated. Patients may be treated by gene replacement therapy. One or more copies of a normal target gene, or a portion of the gene that directs the production of a normal target gene protein with target gene function, may be inserted into cells using vectors which include, but are not limited to adenovirus, adeno- associated virus, and retrovirus vectors, in addition to other particles that introduce DNA into cells, such as liposomes. Additionally, techniques such as those described above may be utilized for the introduction of normal target gene sequences into human cells.
Cells, preferably, autologous cells, containing normal target gene expressing gene sequences may then be introduced or reintroduced into the patient at positions which allow for the amelioration of disease symptoms.
Pharmaceutical Compositions, Effective Dosages, and Routes of Administration
The identified compounds that inhibit target mutant gene expression, synthesis and/or activity can be administered to a patient at therapeutically effective doses to treat or ameliorate the disease. A therapeutically effective dose refers to that amount of the compound sufficient to result in amelioration of symptoms of the disease. Toxicity and therapeutic efficacy of such compounds can be determined by standard pharmaceutical procedures in cell cultures or experimental animals, e.g., for determining the LD50 (the dose lethal to 50% of the population) and the ED50 (the dose therapeutically effective in 50% of the population). The dose ratio between toxic and therapeutic effects is the therapeutic index and it can be expressed as the ratio LD50/ED50. Compounds which exhibit large therapeutic indices are preferred. While compounds that exhibit toxic side effects may be used, care should be taken to design a delivery system that targets such compounds to the site of affected tissue in order to minimize potential damage to uninfected cells and, thereby, reduce side effects. The data obtained from the cell culture assays and animal studies can be used in formulating a range of dosage for use in humans. The dosage of such compounds lies preferably within a range of circulating concentrations that include the ED50 with little or no toxicity. The dosage may vary within this range depending upon the dosage form employed and the route of administration utilized. For any compound used in the method of the invention, the therapeutically effective dose can be estimated initially from cell culture assays. A dose may be formulated in animal models to achieve a circulating plasma concentration range that includes the IC50 (i.e., the concentration of the test compound which achieves a half-maximal inhibition of symptoms) as determined in cell culture. Such information can be used to more accurately determine useful doses in humans. Levels in plasma may be measured, for example, by high performance liquid chromatography.
Pharmaceutical compositions for use in accordance with the present invention may be formulated in conventional manner using one or more physiologically acceptable carriers or excipients. Thus, the compounds and their physiologically acceptable salts and solvates may be formulated for administration by inhalation or insufflation (either through the mouth or the nose) or oral, buccal, parenteral, topical, subcutaneous, intraperitoneal, intraveneous, intrapleural, intraoccular, intraarterial, or rectal administration. It is also contemplated that pharmaceutical compositions may be administered with other products that potentiate the activity of the compound and optionally, may include other therapeutic ingredients.
For oral administration, the pharmaceutical compositions may take the form of, for example, tablets or capsules prepared by conventional means with pharmaceutically acceptable excipients such as binding agents (e.g., pregelatinised maize starch, polyvinylpynolidone or hydroxypropyl methylcellulose); fillers (e.g., lactose, microcrystalline cellulose or calcium hydrogen phosphate); lubricants (e.g., magnesium stearate, talc or silica); disintegrants (e.g., potato starch or sodium starch glycolate); or wetting agents (e.g., sodium lauryl sulphate). The tablets may be coated by methods well known in the art. Liquid preparations for oral administration may take the form of, for example, solutions, syrups or suspensions, or they may be presented as a dry product for constitution with water or other suitable vehicle before use. Such liquid preparations may be prepared by conventional means with pharmaceutically acceptable additives such as suspending agents (e.g., sorbitol syrup, cellulose derivatives or hydrogenated edible fats); emulsifying agents (e.g., lecithin or acacia); non-aqueous vehicles (e.g., almond oil, oily esters, ethyl alcohol or fractionated vegetable oils); and preservatives (e.g., methyl or propyl- p-hydroxybenzoates or sorbic acid). The preparations may also contain buffer salts, flavoring, coloring and sweetening agents as appropriate.
Preparations for oral administration may be suitably formulated to give controlled release of the active compound.
For buccal administration the compositions may take the form of tablets or lozenges formulated in conventional manner. For administration by inhalation, the compounds for use according to the present invention are conveniently delivered in the form of an aerosol spray presentation from pressurized packs or a nebuliser, with the use of a suitable propellant, e.g., dichlorodifluoromethane, trichlorofluoromethane, dichlorotetrafluoroethane, carbon dioxide or other suitable gas. In the case of a pressurized aerosol the dosage unit may be determined by providing a valve to deliver a metered amount. Capsules and cartridges of e.g. gelatin for use in an inhaler or insufflator may be formulated containing a powder mix of the compound and a suitable powder base such as lactose or starch.
The compounds may be formulated for parenteral administration by injection, e.g., by bolus injection or continuous infusion. Formulations for injection may be presented in unit dosage form, e.g., in ampoules or in multi-dose containers, with an added preservative. The compositions may take such forms as suspensions, solutions or emulsions in oily or aqueous vehicles, and may contain formulatory agents such as suspending, stabilizing and/or dispersing agents. Alternatively, the active ingredient may be in powder form for constitution with a suitable vehicle, e.g., sterile pyrogen-free water, before use. The compounds may also be formulated in rectal compositions such as suppositories or retention enemas, e.g., containing conventional suppository bases such as cocoa butter or other glycerides. Oral ingestion is possibly the easiest method of taking any medication. Such a route of administration, is generally simple and straightforward and is frequently the least inconvenient or unpleasant route of administration from the patient's point of view. However, this involves passing the material through the stomach, which is a hostile environment for many materials, including proteins and other biologically active compositions. As the acidic, hydrolytic and proteolytic environment of the stomach has evolved efficiently to digest proteinaceous materials into amino acids and oligopeptides for subsequent anabolism, it is hardly surprising that very little or any of a wide variety of biologically active proteinaceous material, if simply taken orally, would survive its passage through the stomach to be taken up by the body in the small intestine. The result, is that many proteinaceous medicaments must be taken in through another method, such as parenterally, often by subcutaneous, intramuscular or intravenous injection. Pharmaceutical compositions may also include various buffers (e.g., Tris, acetate, phosphate), solubilizers (e.g., Tween, Polysorbate), carriers such as human serum albumin, preservatives (thimerosol, benzyl alcohol) and anti-oxidants such as ascorbic acid in order to stabilize pharmaceutical activity. The stabilizing agent may be a detergent, such as tween-20, tween-80, NP-40 or Triton X-100. EBP may also be incorporated into paniculate preparations of polymeric compounds for controlled delivery to a patient over an extended period of time. A more extensive survey of components in pharmaceutical compositions is found in Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 18th ed., A. R. Gennaro, ed., Mack Publishing, Easton, Pa. (1990).
In addition to the formulations described previously, the compounds may also be formulated as a depot preparation. Such long acting formulations may be administered by implantation (for example subcutaneously or intramuscularly) or by intramuscular injection. Thus, for example, the compounds may be formulated with suitable polymeric or hydrophobic materials (for example as an emulsion in an acceptable oil) or ion exchange resins, or as sparingly soluble derivatives, for example, as a sparingly soluble salt. The compositions may, if desired, be presented in a pack or dispenser device which may contain one or more unit dosage forms containing the active ingredient. The pack may for example comprise metal or plastic foil, such as a blister pack. The pack or dispenser device may be accompanied by instructions for administration.
Diagnostics
A variety of methods may be employed to diagnose disease conditions associated with the target gene. Specifically, reagents may be used, for example, for the detection of the presence of target gene mutations, or the detection of either over or under expression of target gene mRNA. According to the diagnostic and prognostic method of the present invention, alteration of the wild-type target gene locus is detected. Ln addition, the method can be performed by detecting the wild-type target gene locus and confirming the lack of a predisposition or neoplasia. "Alteration of a wild-type gene" encompasses all forms of mutations including deletions, insertions and point mutations in the coding and noncoding regions. Deletions may be of the entire gene or only a portion of the gene. Point mutations may result in stop codons, frameshift mutations or amino acid substitutions. Somatic mutations are those which occur only in certain tissues, e.g., in the tumor tissue, and are not inherited in the germline. Germline mutations can be found in any of a body's tissues and are inherited. If only a single allele is somatically mutated, an early neoplastic state is indicated. However, if both alleles are mutated, then a late neoplastic state may be indicated. The finding of gene mutations thus provides both diagnostic and prognostic information. A target gene allele which is not deleted (e.g., that found on the sister chromosome to a chromosome carrying a target gene deletion) can be screened for other mutations, such as insertions, small deletions, and point mutations. Mutations found in tumor tissues may be linked to decreased expression of the target gene product. However, mutations leading to non-functional gene products may also be linked to a cancerous state. Point mutational events may occur in regulatory regions, such as in the promoter of the gene, leading to loss or diminution of expression of the mRNA. Point mutations may also abolish proper RNA processing, leading to loss of expression of the target gene product, or a decrease in mRNA stability or translation efficiency.
One test available for detecting mutations in a candidate locus is to directly compare genomic target sequences from cancer patients with those from a control population. Alternatively, one could sequence messenger RNA after amplification, e.g., by PCR, thereby eliminating the necessity of determining the exon structure of the candidate gene. Mutations from cancer patients falling outside the coding region of the target gene can be detected by examining the non-coding regions, such as introns and regulatory sequences near or within the target gene. An early indication that mutations in noncoding regions are important may come from Northern blot experiments that reveal messenger RNA molecules of abnormal size or abundance in cancer patients as compared to control individuals. The methods described herein may be performed, for example, by utilizing prepackaged diagnostic kits comprising at least one specific gene nucleic acid or anti-gene antibody reagent described herein, which may be conveniently used, e.g., in clinical settings, to diagnose patients exhibiting disease symptoms or at risk for developing disease.
Any cell type or tissue, preferably monocytes, endothelial cells, or smooth muscle cells, in which the gene is expressed may be utilized in the diagnostics described below.
DNA or RNA from the cell type or tissue to be analyzed may easily be isolated using procedures which are well known to those in the art. Diagnostic procedures may also be performed in situ directly upon tissue sections (fixed and/or frozen) of patient tissue obtained from biopsies or resections, such that no nucleic acid purification is necessary. Nucleic acid reagents may be used as probes and/or primers for such in situ procedures (see, for example, Nuovo, PCR In Situ Hybridization: Protocols and Applications, Raven Press, N.Y. (1992)).
Gene nucleotide sequences, either RNA or DNA, may, for example, be used in hybridization or amplification assays of biological samples to detect disease-related gene structures and expression. Such assays may include, but are not limited to, Southern or Northern analyses, restriction fragment length polymorphism assays, single stranded conformational polymorphism analyses, in situ hybridization assays, and polymerase chain reaction analyses. Such analyses may reveal both quantitative aspects of the expression pattern of the gene, and qualitative aspects of the gene expression and/or gene composition. That is, such aspects may include, for example, point mutations, insertions, deletions, chromosomal rearrangements, and/or activation or inactivation of gene expression.
Preferred diagnostic methods for the detection of gene-specific nucleic acid molecules may involve for example, contacting and incubating nucleic acids, derived from the cell type or tissue being analyzed, with one or more labeled nucleic acid reagents under conditions favorable for the specific annealing of these reagents to their complementary sequences within the nucleic acid molecule of interest. Preferably, the lengths of these nucleic acid reagents are at least 9 to 30 nucleotides. After incubation, all non-annealed nucleic acids are removed from the nucleic acid:fingerprint molecule hybrid. The presence of nucleic acids from the fingerprint tissue which have hybridized, if any such molecules exist, is then detected. Using such a detection scheme, the nucleic acid from the tissue or cell type of interest may be immobilized, for example, to a solid support such as a membrane, or a plastic surface such as that on a microtitre plate or polystyrene beads. In this case, after incubation, non-annealed, labeled nucleic acid reagents are easily removed. Detection of the remaining, annealed, labeled nucleic acid reagents is accomplished using standard techniques well- known to those in the art.
Alternative diagnostic methods for the detection of gene-specific nucleic acid molecules may involve their amplification, e.g., by PCR (the experimental embodiment set forth in Mullis U.S. Pat. No. 4,683,202 (1987)), ligase chain reaction (Barany, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 88: 189-93 (1991)), self sustained sequence replication (Guatelli, et al., Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. USA, 87: 1874-78 (1990)), transcriptional amplification system (Kwoh, et al, Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. USA. 86: 1 173-77 ( 1989)), Q-Beta Replicase (Lizardi et al, Bio/Technology, 6: 1197 (1988)), or any other nucleic acid amplification method, followed by the detection of the amplified molecules using techniques well known to those of skill in the art. These detection schemes are especially useful for the detection of nucleic acid molecules if such molecules are present in very low numbers.
In one embodiment of such a detection scheme, a cDNA molecule is obtained from an RNA molecule of interest (e.g., by reverse transcription of the RNA molecule into cDNA). Cell types or tissues from which such RNA may be isolated include any tissue in which wild type fingerprint gene is known to be expressed, including, but not limited, to monocytes, endothelium, and/or smooth muscle. A sequence within the cDNA is then used as the template for a nucleic acid amplification reaction, such as a PCR amplification reaction, or the like. The nucleic acid reagents used as synthesis initiation reagents (e.g., primers) in the reverse transcription and nucleic acid amplification steps of this method may be chosen from among the gene nucleic acid reagents described herein. The preferred lengths of such nucleic acid reagents are at least 15-30 nucleotides. For detection of the amplified product, the nucleic acid amplification may be performed using radioactively or non-radioactively labeled nucleotides. Alternatively, enough amplified product may be made such that the product may be visualized by standard ethidium bromide staining or by utilizing any other suitable nucleic acid staining method.
Antibodies directed against wild type or mutant gene peptides may also be used as disease diagnostics and prognostics. Such diagnostic methods, may be used to detect abnormalities in the level of gene protein expression, or abnormalities in the structure and/or tissue, cellular, or subcellular location of fingerprint gene protein. Structural differences may include, for example, differences in the size, electronegativity, or antigenicity of the mutant fingerprint gene protein relative to the normal fingerprint gene protein.
Protein from the tissue or cell type to be analyzed may easily be detected or isolated using techniques which are well known to those of skill in the art, including but not limited to western blot analysis. For a detailed explanation of methods for carrying out western blot analysis, see Sambrook, et al (1989) supra, at Chapter 18. The protein detection and isolation methods employed herein may also be such as those described in Harlow and Lane, for example, (Antibodies: A Laboratory Manual, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, Cold Spring Harbor, New York (1988)).
Preferred diagnostic methods for the detection of wild type or mutant gene peptide molecules may involve, for example, immunoassays wherein fingerprint gene peptides are detected by their interaction with an anti-fingerprint gene-specific peptide antibody.
For example, antibodies, or fragments of antibodies useful in the present invention may be used to quantitatively or qualitatively detect the presence of wild type or mutant gene peptides. This can be accomplished, for example, by immunofluorescence techniques employing a fluorescently labeled antibody (see below) coupled with light microscopic, flow cytometric, or fluorimetric detection. Such techniques are especially preferred if the fingerprint gene peptides are expressed on the cell surface.
The antibodies (or fragments thereof) useful in the present invention may, additionally, be employed histologically, as in immunofluorescence or immunoelectron microscopy, for in situ detection of fingerprint gene peptides. In situ detection may be accomplished by removing a histological specimen from a patient, and applying thereto a labeled antibody of the present invention. The antibody (or fragment) is preferably applied by overlaying the labeled antibody (or fragment) onto a biological sample. Through the use of such a procedure, it is possible to determine not only the presence of the fingerprint gene peptides, but also their distribution in the examined tissue. Using the present invention, those of ordinary skill will readily perceive that any of a wide variety of histological methods (such as staining procedures) can be modified in order to achieve such in situ detection.
Immunoassays for wild type, mutant, or expanded fingerprint gene peptides typically comprise incubating a biological sample, such as a biological fluid, a tissue extract, freshly harvested cells, or cells which have been incubated in tissue culture, in the presence of a detectably labeled antibody capable of identifying fingerprint gene peptides, and detecting the bound antibody by any of a number of techniques well known in the art.
The biological sample may be brought in contact with and immobilized onto a solid phase support or carrier such as nitrocellulose, or other solid support which is capable of immobilizing cells, cell particles or soluble proteins. The support may then be washed with suitable buffers followed by treatment with the detectably labeled gene-specific antibody. The solid phase support may then be washed with the buffer a second time to remove unbound antibody. The amount of bound label on solid support may then be detected by conventional means.
By "solid phase support or carrier" is intended any support capable of binding an antigen or an antibody. Well-known supports or carriers include glass, polystyrene, polypropylene, polyethylene, dextran, nylon, amylases, natural and modified celluloses, polyacrylamides, gabbros, and magnetite. The nature of the carrier can be either soluble to some extent or insoluble for the purposes of the present invention. The support material may have virtually any possible structural configuration so long as the coupled molecule is capable of binding to an antigen or antibody. Thus, the support configuration may be spherical, as in a bead, or cylindrical, as in the inside surface of a test tube, or the external surface of a rod. Alternatively, the surface may be flat such as a sheet, test strip, etc.
Preferred supports include polystyrene beads. Those skilled in the art will know many other suitable carriers for binding antibody or antigen, or will be able to ascertain the same by use of routine experimentation.
The binding activity of a given lot of anti-wild type or -mutant fingerprint gene peptide antibody may be determined according to well known methods. Those skilled in the art will be able to determine operative and optimal assay conditions for each determination by employing routine experimentation.
One of the ways in which the gene peptide-specific antibody can be detectably labeled is by linking the same to an enzyme and using it in an enzyme immunoassay (EIA) (Voller, Ric Clin Lab, 8:289-98 (1978) ["The Enzyme Linked Immunosorbent Assay (ELISA)", Diagnostic Horizons 2:1-7, 1978, Microbiological Associates Quarterly Publication, Walkersville, Md.]; Voller, et al., J. Clin. PathoL, 31:507-20 (1978); Butler, Meth. Enzymol, 73:482-523 (1981); Maggio (ed.), Enzyme Immunoassay, CRC Press, Boca Raton, Fla. (1980); Ishikawa, et al, (eds.) Enzyme Immunoassay, Igaku-Shoin, Tokyo (1981)). The enzyme which is bound to the antibody will react with an appropriate substrate, preferably a chromogenic substrate, in such a manner as to produce a chemical moiety which can be detected, for example, by spectrophotometric, fluorimetric or by visual means. Enzymes which can be used to detectably label the antibody include, but are not limited to, malate dehydrogenase, staphylococcal nuclease, delta-5-steroid isomerase, yeast alcohol dehydrogenase, alpha-glycerophosphate, dehydrogenase, triose phosphate isomerase, horseradish peroxidase, alkaline phosphatase, asparaginase, glucose oxidase, beta- galactosidase, ribonuclease, urease, catalase, glucose-6-phosphate dehydrogenase, glucoamylase and acetylcholinesterase. The detection can be accomplished by colorimetric methods which employ a chromogenic substrate for the enzyme. Detection may also be accomplished by visual comparison of the extent of enzymatic reaction of a substrate in comparison with similarly prepared standards.
Detection may also be accomplished using any of a variety of other immunoassays. For example, by radioactively labeling the antibodies or antibody fragments, it is possible to detect fingerprint gene wild type, mutant, or expanded peptides through the use of a radioimmunoassay (RIA) (see, e.g., Weintraub, B., Principles of Radioimmunoassays,
Seventh Training Course on Radioligand Assay Techniques, The Endocrine Society, March, 1986). The radioactive isotope can be detected by such means as the use of a gamma counter or a scintillation counter or by autoradiography. It is also possible to label the antibody with a fluorescent compound. When the fluorescently labeled antibody is exposed to light of the proper wave length, its presence can then be detected due to fluorescence. Among the most commonly used fluorescent labeling compounds are fluorescein isothiocyanate, rhodamine, phycoerythrin, phycocyanin, allophycocyanin, o-phthaldehyde and fluorescamine. The antibody can also be detectably labeled using fluorescence emitting metals such as 152Eu, or others of the lanthanide series. These metals can be attached to the antibody using such metal chelating groups as diethylenetriaminepentacetic acid (DTPA) or ethylenediamine-tetraacetic acid (EDTA).
The antibody also can be detectably labeled by coupling it to a chemiluminescent compound. The presence of the chemiluminescent-tagged antibody is then determined by detecting the presence of luminescence that arises during the course of a chemical reaction. Examples of particularly useful chemiluminescent labeling compounds are luminol, isoluminol, theromatic acridinium ester, imidazole, acridinium salt and oxalate ester. Likewise, a bioluminescent compound may be used to label the antibody of the present invention. Bioluminescence is a type of chemiluminescence found in biological systems in, which a catalytic protein increases the efficiency of the chemiluminescent reaction. The presence of a bioluminescent protein is determined by detecting the presence of luminescence. Important bioluminescent compounds for purposes of labeling are luciferin, luciferase and aequorin.
Throughout this application, various publications, patents and published patent applications are referred to by an identifying citation. The disclosures of these publications, patents and published patent specifications referenced in this application are hereby incorporated by reference into the present disclosure to more fully describe the state of the art to which this invention pertains.
The following examples are intended only to illustrate the present invention and should in no way be construed as limiting the subject invention.
Examples Example 1: Direct Construct Construction from a Plasmid Library
Genomic libraries using the lambda ZAP™ system were prepared as follows. Embryonic stem cells were grown in 100 mm tissue culture plates. High molecular weight genomic DNA was isolated from these ES cells by adding 5 ml of lysis buffer (10 mM Tris- HCL pH7.5, 10 mM EDTA pH 8.0, 10 mM NaCI, 0.5% SDS, and 1 mg/ml Proteinase K) to a confluent 100 mm plate of embryonic stem cells. The cells were then incubated at 60°C for several hours or until fully lysed. Genomic DNA was purified from the lysed cells by several rounds of gentle phenol : chloroform extractions followed by ethanol precipitation.
The genomic DNA was partially digested with the restriction enzyme Sau 3A I to generate fragments of approximately 5-20 kb. The ends of these fragments were partially filled in by addition of dATP and dGTP in the present of Klenow DNA polymerase, creating incompatible ends on the genomic fragments. Size fragments of between 5 and 10 kb were then purified by agarose gel electrophoresis (lx TAE, 0.8% gel). The DNA was then isolated from the excised agarose pieces using a QIAquick gel extraction kit (Qiagen, Inc., Valencia, CA).
The genomic fragments were ligated into the Lambda Zap™ II vector (Stratagene, Inc., La Jolla, CA) that had been cut with Xho I and partially filled in using dTTP, dCTP, and Klenow DNA polymerase. After ligation, the DNA was packaged using a lambda packaging mix (Gigapack Ul gold, Stratagene, Inc., La Jolla, CA) and the titer was determined. Circular phagemid DNA was derived from the lambda library by growing the lambda clones on the appropriate bacterial strain (XL-1 Blue MRF , Stratagene, Inc.) in the presence of the Ml 3 helper phage, ExAssist (Stratagene, Inc.). Specifically, approximately 100,000 lambda clones were incubated with a 10-100 fold excess of both bacteria and helper phage for 20 minutes at 37°C. One ml of LB media + 10 mM MgS04 was added to each excision reaction and it was incubated overnight at 37°C with shaking. Typically 24-96 of these reactions were set up at a time in a 96 well deep-well block. The following morning, the block was heated to 65°C for 15 minutes to kill both the bacteria and the lambda phage. Bacterial debris was removed by centrifugation at approximately 3000g for 15 minutes. The supernatant containing the circular phagemid DNA, was retained and used directly in plasmid PCR .
The pools of phagemid DNA described above were screened for specific genes of interest using long-range PCR and "outward pointing" oligos, chosen as described above based on the known sequence (depicted in Figure 1). The PCR reactions contains 2 μl of a pool phagemid DNA sample, 3 μl of lOx PCR Buffer 3 (Boehringer Mannheim), 1.1 μl 10 mM dNTPs, 50 nM primers, 0.3 μl of EXPAND Long Template PCR Enzyme Mix
(Boehringer-Mannheim) and 30 μl of H?0. Cycling conditions were 94°C for 2 minutes (1 cycle); 94°C for 10 seconds, 65°C for 30 seconds, 68°C for 15 seconds (15 cycles); 94°C for 10 seconds, 60°C for 30 seconds, 68°C for 15 seconds plus 20 seconds increase per each additional cycle (25 cycles); 68°C for 7 minutes (1 cycle) and holding at 4°C.
The products of the PCR reactions were separated by electrophoresis through agarose gels containing IX TAE buffer and visualized with ethidium bromide and UV light. Any large fragments indicative of successful long-range PCR were excised from the gel and purified using QIAquick PCR purification kit (Qiagen).
In order to eliminate the need to restriction map the PCR fragments, the following ligation-independent cloning strategy was employed. The long-range PCR fragment of interest was "purified" using a QIAquick PCR purification kit (Qiagen, Inc., Santa Clarita, California). Single-stranded ends of the PCR fragments were generated by mixing: 0.1-2 μg of the fragment; 2 μl of NEB (New England BioLabs) Buffer 4; 1 μl of 2 mM dTTP, 6 units of T4 DNA polymerase (NEB), H20 to total volume of 20 μl and incubating at 25°C for 30 minutes. The polymerase was inactivated by heating at 75°C for 20 minutes. Single-stranded ends were also created on the Neor selectable marker fragment by digesting the plasmid vector pDG2 at the unique restriction sites, with Sac I and Sac II (pDG2 depicted in Figure 2A) and treating each reaction with T4 DNA polymerase as above. The vector shown in Figure 1 was prepared with single-stranded ends complementary to those on the long-range PCR fragment.
The vector and fragments were then assembled into constructs using either a two-step cloning strategy or a four-way, single-step protocol. Briefly, a reaction containing 10 ng of T4-treated Neor cassette, 1 μl of T4-treated PCR fragment, 0.2 μl of 0.5 M EDTA, 0.3 μl of 0.5 M NaCI and H20 up to 4 μl was heated to 65°C and allowed to cool to room temperature over approximately 45 minutes. The mixture was then transformed into subcloning efficiency DH5-α competent cells.
Example 2: Generation of Constructs from Phage Libraries
A mouse embryonic stem cell library was prepared in lambda phage as follows. Genomic libraries were constructed from genomic DNA by partial cleavage of DNA at Sau 3AI sites to yield genomic fragments of approximately 20 kb in length. The terminal sequences of these DNA fragments were partially filled in using Klenow enzyme in the presence of dGTP and dATP and the fragments were'ligated using T4 DNA ligase into Xho I sites of an appropriate lambda cloning vector, e.g., lambda Fix II (Stratagene, Inc., La Jolla, California), which had been partially filled in using Klenow in the presence of dTTP and dCTP. Alternatively, the partially digested genomic DNA was size selected using a sucrose gradient and sequences of approximately 20 kb selected for. The enriched fraction was cloned into a Bam HI cut lambda vector, e.g., lambda Datsh II (Stratagene, Inc., La Jolla, California). .
The library was plated onto 1,152 plates, each plate containing approximately 1,000 clones. Thus, a total of 1.1 million clones (the equivalent of 8 genomes) was plated.
The phage were eluted from each plate by adding 4 ml of lambda elution buffer (10 mM MgCl2, 10 mM Tris-pH 8.0) to each plate and incubating for 3 to 5 hours at room temperature. After incubation, 2 ml of buffer was collected from each plate and placed into one well of a 96 deep well plate (Costar, In.). Twelve 96-well plates were filled and referred to as the "sub-pool library."
Using the sub-pool library, "pool libraries" were made by placing 100 μl of 12 different sub-pool wells into one well of a new 96 well plate. The 12 sub-pool plates were combined to form 1 plate of pool libraries.
Using a pair of oligonucleotides that were known to PCR-amplify the gene of interest, supernatant from the 96 pools of the "large-pool library" were amplified. PCR was performed in the presence of 0.5 units of Amplitaq Gold™ (Perkin Elmer), 1 μM of each oligonucleotide, 200 μM dNTPs, 2 μl of a 1 to 5 dilution of the pool (or subpool) supernatant, 50 mM KCl, 100 mM Tris-HCI (pH 8.3), and either 1.5 mM or 1.25 mM MgCl2. Cycling conditions were 95°C for 8 minutes (1 cycle); 95°C for 30 seconds, 60°C for 30 seconds, 72°C for 45 seconds (55 cycles); 72°C for 7 minutes (1 cycle) and holding at 4°C.
Depending on the gene, between about 3 and 12 pool yielded positive signals as identified on agarose gels as described in Example 1. In cases where further purification was necessary (i.e. where a clear signal was not present after amplification), the 12 sub-pools making up the pool were subjected to amplification using the same primers and a single sub-pool (1000 clones) was identified.
Generation of flanking fragments. As described above, knock-out constructs contain two blocks of DNA sequence homologous to the target gene, flanking a positive selection marker. Long-range PCR was performed from the pools of lambda clones positively identified as described above in Example 2. Each fragment was generated using a pair of oligonucleotides with predetermined sequences lacking one type of base and complementary to predetermined sequences on the vector. The fragments obtained were between 1 and 5 kb. A third fragment, longer than 5 kb, is also generated using appropriate oligonucleotides. This third fragment was then used to obtain DNA sequences near the gene to be knocked out but outside of the vector.
Example 3: Two-Step Cloning- General Procedure
The pDG2 plasmid vector (Figure 2A) contains unique restriction sites Sac II and Sac I. Appropriate single-stranded annealing sites were generated by digesting the pDG2 vector with either restriction enzyme Sac II or Sac I and treating each reaction with T4 DNA polymerase and dTTP as described above. Four reactions were set up in microtitre plates for each vector, the reaction containing 1 μl of either (1) T4 DNA polymerase-treated fragments; (2) a 1: 10 dilution of the T4-treated fragments reaction; (3) a 1 : 100 dilution of the T4-treated fragments or (4) H20 (no insert control). The microtitre plates were sealed, placed in- between two temperature blocks heated to 65°C, and allowed to cool slowly at room temperature for 30 to 45 minutes.
The microtitre plate was then placed on ice and 20-25 μl of subcloning efficiency competent cells added to each well. The plate was incubated on ice for 20-30 minutes. The microtitre plate was then placed between two temperature blocks heated to 42°C for 2 minutes, followed by 2 minutes on ice. 100 μl of LB was added to each well, the plate covered with parafilm and incubated 30-60 minutes at 37°C. The entire contents of each well were plated on one LB-Amp plate and incubated at 37°C overnight.
Between about 12-24 colonies were picked from plates which had at least 2-4 times more colonies than the no insert control. The colonies were grown in deep well plates overnight at 37°C and then the plasmid DNA extracted using a Qiagen mini-prep kit.
The plasmid DNA was digested with Not I and Sal I enzymes. As shown in Figure 2A, a Not I/Sal I digestion will generate a large fragment containing cloning sites 3 and 4 and a smaller fragment containing cloning sites 1 and 2 and the Neor gene. After digestion, the reactions were run on a 0.8% agarose gel containing 0.2 μg/ml ethidium bromide. For no inserts, two bands were present, one of 1975 base pairs and one of 2793 base pairs. When an insert fragment was present, at least one of these bands would be larger because it would also contain a fragment (insert 1 or 2) either at the annealing site 1/2 or the site 3/4. The insert bands were excised and treated with a QIAquick gel extraction kit. A second ligation reaction was performed containing 1 μl of 10X ligase buffer (50 mM Tris-HCI pH 7.5, 10 mM MgCl2, 10 mM dithiothreitol, 1 mM ATP, 25 μg/ml bovine serum albumin), 1 μl T4 DNA ligase, 1-2 μl fragment (site 3/4 band), 5 μl of site 1/2 band and H20 up to 10 μl. Controls were also set up replacing either the site 3/4 fragment or the site 1/2 fragment with water. The reactions were incubated 1 to 2 hours at room temperature and transformed with
25 μl of competent cells.
"Flanking DNA" in the context of these examples refers to the genomic sequences flanking the region in the target gene that is to be deleted or mutated. "Flanking DNA" is also described above as the blocks of DNA sequence homologous to the target gene. Rl genomic library refers to a genomic library prepared from the Rl ES cell line. Such libraries can be prepared such as described in Example 1.
Example 4: Generation and Analysis of Mice Comprising Retina-Specific Nuclear Receptor Gene Disruptions
To investigate the role of retina-specific nuclear receptors, disruptions in retina- specific nuclear receptor genes were produced by homologous recombination. Specifically, transgenic mice comprising disruptions in retina-specific nuclear receptor genes were created. More particularly, a retina-specific targeting construct having the ability to disrupt or modify retina-specific nuclear receptor genes, specifically comprising SEQ ED NO: 19 was created using the oligonucleotide sequences identified herein as SEQ ED NO:20 or SEQ ED NO:21. The targeting construct was introduced into ES cells derived from the 129/Sv-+P+Mgf-SLJ/J mouse substrain to generate chimeric mice. FI mice were generated by breeding with C57BL/6 females. F2 homozygous mutant mice were produced by intercrossing FI heterozygous males and females. The transgenic animals comprising disruptions in retina- specific nuclear receptor genes were analyzed for phenotypic changes and expression patterns. The phenotypes associated with a disruption in a retina-specific nuclear receptor gene were determined as follows: Homozygous Mice:
The homozygous mice analyzed demonstrated at least one of the following phenotypes:
Eyes. Eye abnormalities, including severe retinal dysplasia characterized by extensive rosette formation and retinal folding; segmental thinning of the outer nuclear layer of the retina with rods and cones filling the foci; and complete unilateral absence of the retina. Moreover, the space normally occupied by the retina was filled with fibrous connective tissue, spicules of osteoid and some mineral. In areas, connective tissue was adherent to the posterior lens capsule. Posterior synechia with a thickened iris adherent to the anterior aspect of the lens was detected. The pigmented epithelial layer of the retina was thickened and its cells were increased in size and number. The internal structure of the lens was disorganized and comprised swollen and degenerated fibers. In instances where the retina was absent unilaterally, small focal remnants were present.
Gastrointestinal tract. Abnormalities in the gastrointestinal tract included multifocal infiltrates of neutrophils in the deep mucosa and submucosa in the stomach. Skin. Abnormalities in the skin included focal lymphocytic inflammation within the dermis.
Testes/Epididymides. Abnormalities in the testes and epididymides included reduced spermatogenesis. Specifically, seminiferous tubules had scattered degenerate or necrotic spermatogenetic epithelial cells and multinucleated giant cells. The epididymides had reduced number of spermatids, and degenerated cells were present in tubules. The epithelial cells of some epididymal tubules were vacuolated.
Clinical Chemistry/Blood Analysis. Abnormalities included low alanine aminotransferase (ALT) values, aspartate aminotransferase (AST), and creatinine kinase (CK) values as compared to wild-type control values. Alkaline phosphatase (ALP) activity, however, was elevated. Hematological evaluation showed lower total white blood cell count. Heterozygous Mice:
Skin. Abnormalities included local fibrosis and lymphocytic dermatitis. Liver. Abnormalities included pericholangitis with bile duct hyperplasia and fibrosis.
Example 5: Generation and Analysis of Mice Comprising Lymphoid-Specific G-
Protein-Coupled Receptor Gene Disruptions
To investigate the role of lymphoid-specific G-protein coupled receptors, disruptions in lymphoid-specific G-protein coupled receptor genes were produced by homologous recombination. Specifically, transgenic mice comprising disruptions in lymphoid-specific G- protein coupled receptor genes were created. More particularly, a lymphoid-specific GPCR targeting construct having the ability to disrupt or modify lymphoid-specific G-protein coupled receptor genes, specifically comprising SEQ ID NO:22 was created using the oligonucleotide sequences identified herein as SEQ ID NO:23 and SEQ ID NO:24. The targeting construct was inserted into ES cells derived from the 129/OlaHsd mouse substrain to generate chimeric mice. FI mice were generated by breeding with C57BL/6 females. F2 homozygous mutant mice were produced by intercrossing FI heterozygous males and females. The transgenic animals comprising disruptions in lymphoid-specific G-protein coupled receptor genes were analyzed for phenotypic changes and expression patterns. The phenotypes associated with a disruption in a lymphoid-specific GPCR were determined as follows:
Homozygous Mice:
The homozygous mice demonstrated at least one of the following phenotypes: Lung. Abnormalities in the lung included cellular infiltrates around bronchioles. Pulmonary changes, exhibiting varying degrees of patchy peribronchial lymphocytic cellular infiltrates were detected. The infiltrates were primarily composed of small lymphocytes. Peribronchial lymphocytic cuffing included focal subpleural collections of lymphocytes; fibrinoid necrosis in vessel walls; and hyperplasia of bronchial epithelium.
Pancreas. Abnormalities in the pancreas included pancreatic cellular infiltrates near ducts and islets. Specifically, periductular cellular infiltrates or peri-islet cellular infiltrates were present, and were primarily composed of small lymphocytes.
Stomach. Abnormalities in the stomach included gastric mixed cellular infiltrates composed of small lymphocytes, granulocytes, and plasma cells. The infiltrates involved the deep mucosa, submucosa and/ or the muscularis of the stomach. Liver. Abnormalities in the liver included cellular infiltrates, predominately lymphocytes that involved the portal triad.
Expression A nalysis :
LacZ (beta-galactosidase) expression was detected in the spleen and lymph nodes.
Specifically, in the lymph nodes, several cells showed strong X-Gal staining. In the spleen, strong staining was detected in some cells in the red pulp.
Example 6: Generation and Analysis of Mice Comprising Melanocyte Stimulating Hormone Receptor Gene Disruptions To investigate the role of GPCR melanocyte stimulating hormones, disruptions in
GPCR melanocyte stimulating hormone genes were produced by homologous recombination. Specifically, transgenic mice comprising disruptions in GPCR melanocyte stimulating hormone genes were created. More particularly, a melanocyte stimulating hormone targeting construct having the ability to disrupt or modify genes encoding melanoyte stimulating hormone receptors, specifically comprising SEQ ID NO:25 was created using the oligonucleotide sequences identified herein as SEQ ID NO:26 and SEQ ED NO:27. The targeting construct was inserted into ES cells derived from the 129/OlaHsd mouse substrain to generate chimeric mice. FI mice were generated by breeding with C57BL/6 females. F2 homozygous mutant mice were produced by intercrossing FI heterozygous males and females.
The transgenic animals comprising disruptions in melanocyte stimulating hormone receptor genes were analyzed for phenotypic changes and expression patterns. The phenotypes associated with a disruption in a melanocyte stimulating hormone receptor gene were determined as follows:
Behavioral Analysis. The homozygous mice were significantly different from wild- type mice in the total distance traveled in the open field test. The homozygous mice were hypoactive, in that they moved about and explored the open field significantly than their wild-type counterparts. The open field test has been used to demonstrate the changes in activity level and anxiety. Thus, the open field data demonstrates that the homozygous mice were hypoactive than the wild-type control mice.
LacZ Expression Analysis. LacZ (beta-gal actosidase) expression was detected in the esophagus, skin, and in the male reproductive system.
Example 7: Generation and Analysis of Mice Comprising Magnesium-
Dependent Protein Phosphatase Gene Disruptions
To investigate the role of magnesium-dependent protein phosphatase genes, disruptions in magnesium-dependent protein phosphatase genes were produced by homologous recombination. Specifically, transgenic mice comprising disruptions in magnesium-dependent protein phosphatase genes were created. More particularly, a magnesium-dependent protein phosphatase gene targeting construct having the ability to disrupt and mutate magnesium-dependent protein phosphatase genes, specifically genes comprising SEQ ED NO:28, was created using the oligonucleotide sequences identified herein as SEQ ED NO:29 and SEQ ED NO:30. The targeting construct was inserted into ES cells derived from the 129/OlaHsd mouse substrain to generate chimeric mice. FI mice were generated by breeding with C57BL/6 females. F2 homozygous mutant mice were produced by intercrossing FI heterozygous males and females.
The transgenic animals comprising disruptions in magnesium-dependent protein phosphatase genes were analyzed for phenotypic changes and expression patterns. The phenotypes associated with a disruption in magnesium-dependent protein genes were determined as follows:
Homozygous Mice:
The homozygous mice demonstrated at least one of the following phenotypes: Lung. Abnormalities in the lung included pulmonary lesions suggestive of foreign body aspiration pneumonia. Patchy, peribronchial, acute inflammation with associated granulomata (probably foreign body), foamy alveolar macrophages, and eosinophilic crystals within alveolar macrophages were found in the lungs. Patchy yellow-red discoloration of the lungs was also detected. Hematology. Abnormalities in the blood included elevated white blood cell (WBC) count.
Necropsy Examination. Patchy, red-yellow lung discoloration. Muscles and bones were softer than wild-type controls. Expression Analysis: Strong lacZ expression was detectable in all tissue or organs examined, including the brain, spinal cord, sciatic nerve, eyes, harderian glands, thymus, spleen, lymph nodes, bone marrow, aorta, heart, lung, liver, gallbladder, pancreas, kidney, urinary bladder, trachea, larynx, esophagus, thyroid gland, pituitary gland, adrenal gland, salivary gland, tongue, skeletal muscle, skin, and female and male reproductive systems.
Example 8: Generation and Analysis of Mice Comprising a Chemokine Receptor 1-Like Protein Gene Disruptions
To investigate the role of chemokine receptor 1-like protein genes, disruptions in chemokine receptor 1 -like genes were produced by homologous recombination. Specifically, transgenic mice comprising disruptions in chemokine receptor 1-like genes were created. More particularly, a chemokine receptor 1-like gene targeting construct having the ability to disrupt and mutate chemokine receptor 1-like genes, specifically comprising SEQ ID NO:31 , was created using the oligonucleotide sequences identified herein as SEQ ED NO:32 and SEQ ID NO:33. The targeting construct was inserted into ES cells derived from the 129/OlaHsd mouse substrain to generate chimeric mice. FI mice were generated by breeding with C57BL/6 females. F2 homozygous mutant mice were produced by intercrossing FI heterozygous males and females.
Example 9: Generation and Analysis of Mice Comprising cGMP
Phosphodiesterase Gene Disruption
To investigate the role of cGMP phosphodiesterase genes, disruptions in cGMP phosphodiesterase genes were produced by homologous recombination. Specifically, transgenic mice comprising disruptions in cGMP phosphodiesterase genes were created. More particularly, a cGMP phosphodiesterase gene targeting construct having the ability to disrupt and mutate cGMP phosphodiesterase genes, specifically comprising SEQ ID NO: 34, was created using the oligonucleotide sequences identified herein as SEQ ED NO:35 and SEQ ED NO:36. The targeting construct was inserted into ES cells derived from the 129/OlaHsd mouse substrain to generate chimeric mice. FI mice were generated by breeding with C57BL/6 females. F2 homozygous mutant mice were produced by intercrossing FI heterozygous males and females.
The transgenic animals comprising disruptions in cGMP phosphodiesterase genes were analyzed for phenotypic changes and expression patterns. The phenotypes associated with a disruption in cGMP phosphodiesterase genes were determined as follows: Horn ozygous Mice :
The homozygous mice demonstrated at least one of the following phenotypes: Eyes. Homozygous mice demonstrated eye abnormalities, particularly involving the retina and more specifically, retinal degeneration (RD), including severe bilateral retinal degeneration or retinal dysplasia, accompanied with complete absence of photoreceptor layers (i.e., rods and cones, outer nuclear layer, outer plexiform layer). The rods and cones are the dendrites of the photoreceptor cells, the outer nuclear layer represents the nuclei of the photoreceptor cells, and the outer plexiform layer represents the axon fibers of the photoreceptor cells. Such eye abnormalities may be accompanied by vision problems or blindness. Other changes in the eyes of these mice included: thinning and vacuolation of the inner nuclear layer; thinning of the inner plexiform layer; loss of ganglion cell nuclei, especially large ganglion cells; gliosis of the nerve fiber layer; and, attenuation of retinal vasculature. The RD observed in mice is analogous to retinitis pigmentosa (RP) in humans. Aorta. Abnormality in the aorta included adventitia or inflammation of the aorta. Kidney. The kidney abnormalities included tubular dilation or pyelitis. Liver. The liver abnormalities detected included extramedullary hematopoiesis.
Lymph Nodes. Abnormalities in the lymph nodes included lymphoid hyperplasia, lymphoid atrophy, or hemorrhage. Skin. Skin abnormalities included dermatitis.
Body Weight. Abnormalities included increased body weights and length. Specifically, body weight was increased by about 11%-37% in males, and body length was increased by about 13% over control mice. Body weight to body length ratio was increased about 23%. Organ Weight. Increased organ weights were found in the spleen and thymus gland, kidney and liver. Specifically, spleen weight increases ranged from about 13% to 28%, and thymus gland weight increases ranged from about 17% to 30%. Kidney weight was increased by about 16% and liver weight was increased by about 38%.
Clinical Chemistry. Elevated levels of ALT (alanine aminotransferase), phosphorus, potassium, or bilirubin were detected.
Behavioral Analysis. Homozygous mice exhibited significantly increased activity, traveling a much greater total distance and exploring the open field more in the open field test. This observation indicated hyperactivity in the homozygous mice.
Heterozygous Mice: Eyes. Eye abnormalities included discoloration including pink eyes.
LacZ Expression Analysis:
LacZ (beta-galactosidase) expression was detected in the thyroid glands, salivary glands proper, salivary glands of the larynx, peritracheal and submucosal glands of the trachea and the mucous glands of the tongue.
Example 10: Generation and Analysis of Mice Comprising Sulfotransferase Gene Disruptions
To investigate the role of sulfotransferases, disruptions in sulfotransferase genes were produced by homologous recombination. Specifically, transgenic mice comprising disruptions in sulfotransferase genes were created. More particularly, a sulfotransferase gene targeting construct having the ability to disrupt or modify sulfotransferase genes, specifically genes comprising SEQ ID NO:37, was created using the oligonucleotide sequences identified herein as SEQ ID NO:38 and SEQ ID NO:39. The targeting construct was introduced into ES cells derived from the 129/OlaHsd mouse substrain to generate chimeric mice. FI mice were generated by breeding with C57BL/6 females. F2 homozygous mutant mice were produced by intercrossing FI heterozygous males and females. The animals were evaluated for phenotypic changes. The phenotypes associated with a disruption in a sulfotransferase gene were determined as follows: Homozygous Mice:
Liver. The homozygous mice demonstrated abnormalities in the liver as compared to wild-type mice. The homozygous mice demonstrated at least one of the following: patchy pallor of acinar zone 3 hepatocytes; eosinophilic globules of varying size with intranuclear invaginations within the cytoplasm of hepatocytes; or anisocytosis, anisonucleosis and increased mitotic cellular activity as compared to wild-type mice.
Salivary Glands. Homozygous mice demonstrated abnormalities in the Harderian glands and salivary glands. Specifically, there was focal pigment deposition in the glands and atrophy and fibrosis in the submandibular gland. Behavioral Analysis. The homozygous mice demonstrated aggressive, hyperactive and less anxious behavior as compared to wild-type mice. Specifically, beginning at two weeks of age, the homozygote mutant male mice exhibited increased aggression compare to wild-type littermates. During home cage observations, these animals attacked their cage- mates more than normal male mice, and had to be housed separately to prevent such attacks. In addition, the homozygote mutant mice were significantly different from the wild-type mice in the open field test. Mutants were hyperactive moving about, and exploring the open field more readily than wild-type mice, exhibiting increased activity and decreased anxiety compared to the wild-type mice.
The homozygote mice were significantly different from wild-types in the Open field (% of time spent in central). The homozygous mice were less anxious spending a higher percentage of time in the central portion of the open field than the wild-type mice.
As is apparent to one of skill in the art, various modifications of the above embodiments can be made without departing from the spirit and scope of this invention. These modifications and variations are within the scope of this invention.

Claims

ClaimsWe claim:
1. A targeting construct comprising:
(a) a first polynucleotide sequence homologous to a target gene, wherein the target gene is selected from the group consisting of a retina-specific nuclear receptor gene, a lymphoid-specific GPCR gene, a melanocyte stimulating hormone receptor gene, a magnesium-dependent protein phosphatase gene, chemokine receptor 1-like protein gene, a cGMP phosphodiesterase gene or a sulfotransferase gene;
(b) a second polynucleotide sequence homologous to the target gene; and (c) a selectable marker.
2. The targeting construct of claim 1, wherein the targeting construct further comprises a screening marker.
3. A method of producing a targeting construct for a target gene, wherein the target gene is selected from the group consisting of a retina-specific nuclear receptor gene, a lymphoid- specific GPCR gene, a melanocyte stimulating hormone receptor gene, a magnesium- dependent protein phosphatase gene, chemokine receptor 1-like protein gene, a cGMP phosphodiesterase gene or a sulfotransferase gene, the method comprising:
(a) obtaining a first polynucleotide sequence homologous to a target gene;
(b) obtaining a second polynucleotide sequence homologous to the target gene; (c) providing a vector comprising a selectable marker; and
(d) inserting the first and second sequences into the vector, to produce the targeting construct.
4. A method of producing a targeting construct for a target gene, wherein the target gene is selected from the group consisting of a retina-specific nuclear receptor gene, a lymphoid- specific GPCR gene, a melanocyte stimulating hormone receptor gene, a magnesium- dependent protein phosphatase gene, chemokine receptor 1-like protein gene, a cGMP phosphodiesterase gene or a sulfotransferase gene, the method comprising:
(a) providing a polynucleotide sequence homologous to the target gene;
(b) generating two different fragments of the polynucleotide sequence; (c) providing a vector having a gene encoding a selectable marker; and (d) inserting the two different fragments into the vector to form the targeting construct.
5. A cell comprising a disruption in a target gene, wherein the target gene is selected from the group consisting of a retina-specific nuclear receptor gene, a lymphoid-specific GPCR gene, a melanocyte stimulating hormone receptor gene, a magnesium-dependent protein phosphatase gene, chemokine receptor 1-like protein gene, a cGMP phosphodiesterase gene or a sulfotransferase gene.
6. The cell of claim 5, wherein the cell is a murine cell.
7. The cell of claim 6, wherein the murine cell is an embryonic stem cell.
8. A non-human transgenic animal comprising a disruption in a target gene, wherein said target gene is selected from the group consisting of a retina-specific nuclear receptor gene, a lymphoid-specific GPCR gene, a melanocyte stimulating hormone receptor gene, a magnesium-dependent protein phosphatase gene, chemokine receptor 1-like protein gene, a cGMP phosphodiesterase gene or a sulfotransferase gene.
9. A cell derived from the non-human transgenic animal of claim 8.
10. A method of producing a transgenic mouse comprising a disruption in a target gene, the method comprising:
(a) introducing the targeting construct of claim 1 into a cell;
(b) introducing the cell into a blastocyst;
(c) implanting the resulting blastocyst into a pseudopregnant mouse, wherein said pseudopregnant mouse gives birth to a chimeric mouse; and
(d) breeding the chimeric mouse to produce the transgenic mouse.
11. A method of identifying an agent that modulates the expression of a target gene, wherein the target gene is selected from the group consisting of a retina-specific nuclear receptor gene, a lymphoid-specific GPCR gene, a melanocyte stimulating hormone receptor gene, a magnesium-dependent protein phosphatase gene, chemokine receptor 1-like protein gene, a cGMP phosphodiesterase gene or a sulfotransferase gene, the method comprising:
(a) providing a non-human transgenic animal comprising a disruption in the target gene;
(b) administering an agent to the non-human transgenic animal; and (c) determining whether the expression of the disrupted target gene in the non-human transgenic animal is modulated.
12. A method of identifying an agent that modulates the function of a target gene, wherein the target gene is selected from the group consisting of a retina-specific nuclear receptor gene, a lymphoid-specific GPCR gene, a melanocyte stimulating hormone receptor gene, a magnesium-dependent protein phosphatase gene, chemokine receptor 1-like protein gene, a cGMP phosphodiesterase gene or a sulfotransferase gene, the method comprising: (a) providing a non-human transgenic animal comprising a disruption in the target gene;
(b) administering an agent to the non-human transgenic animal; and
(c) determining whether the function of the disrupted target gene in the non-human transgenic animal is modulated.
13. A method of identifying an agent that modulates the expression of a target gene, wherein the target gene is selected from the group consisting of a retina-specific nuclear receptor gene, a lymphoid-specific GPCR gene, a melanocyte stimulating hormone receptor gene, a magnesium-dependent protein phosphatase gene, chemokine receptor 1-like protein gene, a cGMP phosphodiesterase gene or a sulfotransferase gene, the method comprising: (a) providing a cell comprising a disruption in a target gene;
(b) contacting the cell with an agent; and
(c) determining whether expression of the target gene is modulated.
14. A method of identifying an agent that modulates the function of a target gene, wherein the target gene is selected from the group consisting of a retina-specific nuclear receptor gene, a lymphoid-specific GPCR gene, a melanocyte stimulating hormone receptor gene, a magnesium-dependent protein phosphatase gene, chemokine receptor 1-like protein gene, a cGMP phosphodiesterase gene or a sulfotransferase gene, the method comprising:
(a) providing a cell comprising a disruption in a target gene;
(b) contacting the cell with an agent; and (c) determining whether the function of the target gene is modulated.
15. The method of claim 13 or claim 14, wherein the cell is derived from the non-human transgenic animal of claim 8.
16. An agent identified by the method of claim 11, claim 12, claim 13, or claim 14.
17. A transgenic mouse comprising a disruption in a retina-specific nuclear receptor gene, wherein the transgenic mouse exhibits an eye abnormality.
18. The transgenic mouse of claim 17, wherein the eye abnormality is a retinal abnormality.
19. The transgenic mouse of claim 18, wherein the retinal abnormality is characterized by retinal dysplasia.
20. The transgenic mouse of claim 19, wherein the transgenic mouse exhibits at least one of the following characteristics: rosette formation in the retina, retinal folding, segmental thinning or absence of the outer nuclear layer of the retina, or absence of the retina.
21. The transgenic mouse of claim 17, wherein the transgenic mouse is heterozygous for a disruption in a retina-specific nuclear receptor gene.
22. The transgenic mouse of claim 17, wherein the transgenic mouse is homozygous for a disruption in a retina-specific nuclear receptor gene.
23. A method of producing a transgenic mouse comprising a disruption in a retina-specific nuclear receptor gene, wherein the transgenic mouse exhibits an eye abnormality, the method comprising: (a) introducing a retina-specific nuclear receptor gene targeting construct into a cell;
(b) introducing the cell into a blastocyst;
(c) implanting the resulting blastocyst into a pseudopregnant mouse, wherein said pseudopregnant mouse gives birth to a chimeric mouse; and
(d) breeding the chimeric mouse to produce the transgenic mouse comprising a disruption in a retina-specific nuclear receptor gene.
24. A transgenic mouse comprising a disruption in a retina- specific nuclear receptor gene, wherein the transgenic animal exhibits at least one of the following phenotypes: an abnormality of the gastrointestinal tract; an abnormality of the skin; an abnormality of the testes or epididymides; or an abnormality in the blood.
25. A cell derived from the transgenic mouse of claim 17, claim 23 or claim 24, wherein the cell comprises a disruption in a retina-specific nuclear receptor gene.
26. A method of identifying an agent that ameliorates an eye abnormality, the method comprising:
(a) administering an agent to a transgenic mouse comprising a disruption in a retina- specific nuclear receptor gene; and
(b) determining whether the agent ameliorates the eye abnormality of the transgenic mouse.
27. The method of claim 26, wherein the eye abnormality is a retinal abnormality.
28. The method of claim 27, wherein the retinal abnormality is characterized by retinal dysplasia.
29. The method of claim 28, wherein the transgenic mouse exhibits at least one of the following characteristics: rosette formation in the retina, retinal folding, segmental thinning or absence of the outer nuclear layer of the retina, or absence of the retina.
30. A method of identifying an agent which modulates retina-specific nuclear receptor gene expression, the method comprising:
(a) administering an agent to the transgenic mouse comprising a disruption in a retina-specific nuclear receptor gene; and
(b) determining whether the agent modulates retina-specific nuclear receptor gene expression in the transgenic mouse, wherein the agent modulates a phenotype associated with a disruption in a retina-specific nuclear receptor gene.
31. The method of claim 30, wherein the phenotype comprises any one of the following: an eye abnormality; an abnormality of the gastrointestinal tract; an abnormality of the skin; an abnormality of the testes or epididymides; or an abnormality in the blood.
32. A method of identifying an agent which modulates a phenotype associated with a disruption in a retina-specific nuclear receptor gene, the method comprising:
(a) administering an agent to a transgenic mouse comprising a disruption in a retina- specific nuclear receptor gene; and
(b) determining whether the agent modulates the phenotype.
33. The method of claim 32, wherein the phenotype comprises any one of the following: an eye abnormality; an abnormality of the gastrointestinal tract; an abnormality of the skin; an abnormality of the testes or epididymides; or an abnormality in the blood.
34. A method of identifying an agent which modulates retina-specific nuclear receptor gene expression, the method comprising: (a) providing a cell comprising a disruption in a retina-specific nuclear receptor gene;
(b) contacting the cell with an agent; and
(c) determining whether the agent modulates retina-specific nuclear receptor gene expression, wherein the agent modulates a phenotype associated with a disruption in a retina-specific nuclear receptor gene.
35. The method of claim 34, wherein the phenotype comprises any one of the following: an eye abnormality; an abnormality of the gastrointestinal tract; an abnormality of the skin; an abnormality of the testes or epididymides; or an abnormality in the blood.
36. A method of identifying an agent which modulates retina-specific nuclear receptor gene function, the method comprising: (a) providing a cell comprising a disruption in a retina-specific nuclear receptor gene;
(b) contacting the cell with an agent; and (c) determining whether the agent modulates retina-specific nuclear receptor gene function, wherein the agent modulates a phenotype associated with a disruption in a retina-specific nuclear receptor gene.
37. The method of claim 36, wherein the phenotype comprises any one of the following: an eye abnormality; an abnormality of the gastrointestinal tract; an abnormality of the skin; an abnormality of the testes or epididymides; or an abnormality in the blood.
38. An agent identified by the method of claim 26, claim 30, claim 32, claim 34 or claim 36.
39. A transgenic mouse comprising a disruption in a lymphoid-specific GPCR gene, wherein the transgenic mouse exhibits cellular infiltration.
40. The transgenic mouse of claim 39, wherein the cellular infiltration is comprised of lymphocytes.
41. The transgenic mouse of claim 40, wherein the cellular infiltration occurs in any one of the following organs: lung, pancreas, stomach or liver.
42. The transgenic mouse of claim 39, wherein the transgenic mouse is heterozygous for a disruption in a lymphoid-specific GPCR gene.
43. The transgenic mouse of claim 39, wherein the transgenic mouse is homozygous for a disruption in a lymphoid-specific GPCR gene.
44. A method of producing a transgenic mouse comprising a disruption in a lymphoid- specific GPCR gene, wherein the transgenic mouse exhibits cellular infiltration, the method comprising: (a) introducing a lymphoid-specific GPCR targeting construct into a cell;
(b) introducing the cell into a blastocyst;
(c) implanting the resulting blastocyst into a pseudopregnant mouse, wherein said pseudopregnant mouse gives birth to a chimeric mouse; and
(d) breeding the chimeric mouse to produce the transgenic mouse comprising a disruption in a lymphoid-specific GPCR gene.
45. A transgenic mouse comprising a disruption in a lymphoid-specific GPCR gene, wherein the transgenic mouse exhibits at least one of the following phenotypes: peribronchiolar cellular infiltrates in the lungs; periductular cellular infiltrates in the pancreas; cellular infiltrates in the deep mucosa, submucosa, or muscularis of the stomach; or cellular infiltrates in the portal triads of the liver.
46. A cell derived from the transgenic mouse of claim 39, claim 44 or claim 45, wherein the cell comprises a disruption in a lymphoid-specific GPCR gene.
47. A method of identifying an agent that ameliorates cellular infiltration, the method comprising:
(a) administering the agent to the transgenic mouse comprising a disruption in a lymphoid-specific GPCR gene; and
(b) determining whether the agent ameliorates cellular infiltration in the transgenic mouse.
48. The method of claim 47, wherein the cellular infiltration is comprised of lymphocytes.
49. The method of claim 48, wherein the cellular infiltration occurs in any one of the following organs: lung, pancreas, stomach or liver.
50. A method of identifying an agent which modulates lymphoid-specific GPCR gene expression, the method comprising:
(a) administering an agent to the transgenic mouse comprising a disruption in a lymphoid-specific GPCR gene; and
(b) determining whether the agent modulates lymphoid-specific GPCR expression in the transgenic mouse, wherein the agent modulates a phenotype associated with a disruption in a lymphoid-specific GPCR gene.
51. The method of claim 50, wherein the phenotype comprises cellular infiltration in any one of the following organs: lung, pancreas, stomach or liver.
52. The method of claim 51, wherein the cellular infiltration is comprised of lymphocytes.
53. A method of identifying an agent which modulates lymphoid-specific GPCR gene expression, the method comprising:
(a) providing a cell comprising a disruption in a lymphoid-specific GPCR gene;
(b) contacting the cell with the agent; and
(c) determining whether the agent modulates lymphoid-specific GPCR gene expression, wherein the agent modulates a phenotype associated with a disruption in a lymphoid-specific GPCR gene.
54. The method of claim 53, wherein the phenotype comprises cellular infiltration in any one of the following organs: lung, pancreas, stomach or liver.
55. The method of claim 54, wherein the cellular infiltration is comprised of lymphocytes.
56. A method of identifying an agent which modulates lymphoid-specific GPCR gene function, the method comprising:
(a) providing a cell comprising disruption in a lymphoid-specific GPCR gene;
(b) contacting the cell with an agent; and (c) determining whether the agent modulates lymphoid-specific GPCR gene function, wherein the agent modulates a phenotype associated with a disruption in a lymphoid- specific GPCR gene.
57. The method of claim 56, wherein the phenotype comprises cellular infiltration in any one of the following organs: lung, pancreas, stomach or liver.
58. A method of identifying an agent which modulates a phenotype associated with a disruption in a lymphoid-specific GPCR gene, the method comprising:
(a) administering an agent to a transgenic mouse comprising a disruption in a lymphoid-specific GPCR gene; and
(b) determining whether the agent modulates the phenotype.
59. The method of claim 58, wherein the phenotype comprises cellular infiltration in any one of the following organs: lung, pancreas, stomach or liver.
60. An agent identified by the method of claim 47, claim 50, claim 53, claim 56 or claim 58.
61. A transgenic mouse comprising a disruption in a melanocyte stimulating hormone receptor gene, wherein the transgenic mouse exhibits hypoactive behavior.
62. The transgenic mouse of claim 61, wherein the transgenic mouse is heterozygous for a disruption in a melanocyte stimulating hormone receptor gene.
63. The transgenic mouse of claim 61, wherein the transgenic mouse is homozygous for a disruption in a melanocyte stimulating hormone receptor gene.
64. A method of producing a transgenic mouse comprising a disruption in a melanocyte stimulating hormone receptor gene, wherein the transgenic mouse exhibits hypoactive behavior, the method comprising:
(a) introducing melanocyte stimulating hormone receptor gene targeting construct into a cell;
(b) introducing the cell into a blastocyst; (c) implanting the resulting blastocyst into a pseudopregnant mouse, wherein said pseudopregnant mouse gives birth to a chimeric mouse; and (d) breeding the chimeric mouse to produce the transgenic mouse comprising a disruption in a retina-specific nuclear receptor gene.
65. A cell derived from the transgenic mouse of claim 61 or claim 64, wherein the cell comprises a disruption in a melanocyte stimulating hormone receptor gene.
66. A method of identifying an agent that ameliorates hypoactive behavior, the method comprising: (a) administering an agent to a transgenic mouse comprising a disruption in a melanocyte stimulating hormone receptor gene; and
(b) determining whether the agent ameliorates hypoactive behavior of the transgenic mouse.
67. A method of identifying an agent which modulates melanocyte stimulating hormone receptor gene expression, the method comprising:
(a) administering an agent to the transgenic mouse comprising a disruption in a melanocyte stimulating hormone receptor gene; and
(b) determining whether the agent modulates melanocyte stimulating hormone receptor gene expression in the transgenic mouse, wherein the agent has an effect on hypoactive behavior of the transgenic mouse.
68. A method of identifying an agent which modulates hypoactive associated with a disruption in a melanocyte stimulating hormone receptor gene, the method comprising:
(a) administering an agent to a transgenic mouse comprising a disruption in a melanocyte stimulating hormone receptor gene; and (b) determining whether the agent modulates hypoactive behavior of the transgenic mouse.
69. An agent identified by the method of claim 66, claim 67 or claim 68.
70. A transgenic mouse comprising a disruption in a magnesium-dependent protein phosphatase gene, wherein the transgenic mouse exhibits a lung abnormality or an elevated white blood cell count.
71. The transgenic mouse of claim 70, wherem the lung abnormality comprises pulmonary lesions.
72. The transgenic mouse of claim 71, wherein the pulmonary lesions are consistent with pneumonia.
73. The transgenic mouse of claim 70, wherein the transgenic mouse is heterozygous for a disruption in a magnesium-dependent protein phosphatase gene.
74. The transgenic mouse of claim 70, wherein the transgenic mouse is homozygous for a disruption in a magnesium-dependent protein phosphatase gene.
75. A method of producing a transgenic mouse comprising a disruption in a magnesium- dependent protein phosphatase gene, wherein the transgenic mouse exhibits a lung abnormality or an elevated white blood cell count, the method comprising:
(a) introducing a magnesium-dependent protein phosphatase gene targeting construct into a cell; (b) introducing the cell into a blastocyst;
(c) implanting the resulting blastocyst into a pseudopregnant mouse, wherein said pseudopregnant mouse gives birth to a chimeric mouse; and
(d) breeding the chimeric mouse to produce the transgenic mouse comprising a disruption in a magnesium-dependent protein phosphatase gene.
76. A cell derived from the transgenic mouse of claim 70 or claim 75, wherein the cell comprises a disruption in a magnesium-dependent protein phosphatase gene.
77. A method of identifying an agent that ameliorates a lung abnormality, the method comprising:
(a) administering an agent to a transgenic mouse comprising a disruption in a magnesium-dependent protein phosphatase gene; and
(b) determining whether the agent ameliorates the lung abnormality of the transgenic mouse.
78. The method of claim 77, wherein the lung abnormality comprises pulmonary lesions.
79. The method of claim 78, wherein the pulmonary lesions are consistent with pneumonia.
80. A method of identifying an agent that reduces white blood cell count, the method comprising:
(a) administering an agent to a transgenic mouse comprising a disruption in a magnesium-dependent protein phosphatase gene; and
(b) determining whether the agent reduces white blood cell count in the transgenic mouse.
81. A method of identifying an agent which modulates magnesium-dependent protein phosphatase gene expression, the method comprising:
(a) administering an agent to the transgenic mouse comprising a disruption in a magnesium-dependent protein phosphatase gene; and (b) determining whether the agent modulates magnesium-dependent protein phosphatase gene expression in the transgenic mouse, wherein the agent modulates a phenotype associated with a disruption in a magnesium-dependent protein phosphatase gene.
82. The method of claim 81 , wherein the phenotype comprises a lung abnormality or an elevated white blood cell count.
83. The method of claim 82, wherein the lung abnormality comprises pulmonary lesions.
84. The method of claim 83, wherein the pulmonary lesions are consistent with pneumonia.
85. A method of identifying an agent which modulates a phenotype associated with a disruption in a magnesium-dependent protein phosphatase gene, the method comprising:
(a) administering an agent to a transgenic mouse comprising a disruption in a magnesium-dependent protein phosphatase gene; and
(b) determining whether the agent modulates the phenotype.
86. The method of claim 85, wherein the phenotype comprises a lung abnormality or an elevated white blood cell count.
87. The method of claim 86, wherein the lung abnormality comprises pulmonary lesions.
88. The method of claim 87, wherein the pulmonary lesions are consistent with pneumonia.
89. A method of identifying an agent which modulates magnesium-dependent protein phosphatase gene expression, the method comprising:
(a) providing a cell comprising a disruption in a magnesium-dependent protein phosphatase gene;
(b) contacting the cell with an agent; and
(c) determining whether the agent modulates magnesium-dependent protein phosphatase gene expression, wherein the agent modulates a phenotype associated with a disruption in a magnesium-dependent protein phosphatase gene.
90. The method of claim 89, wherein the phenotype comprises a lung abnormality or an elevated white blood cell count.
91. The method of claim 90, wherein the lung abnormality comprises pulmonary lesions.
92. The method of claim 91, wherein the pulmonary lesions are consistent with pneumonia.
93. A method of identifying an agent which modulates magnesium-dependent protein phosphatase gene function, the method comprising:
(a) providing a cell comprising a disruption in a magnesium-dependent protein phosphatase gene; (b) contacting the cell with an agent; and
(c) determining whether the agent modulates magnesium-dependent protein phosphatase gene function, wherein the agent modulates a phenotype associated with a disruption in a magnesium-dependent protein phosphatase gene.
94. The method of claim 93, wherein the phenotype comprises a lung abnormality or an elevated white blood cell count.
95. The method of claim 94, wherein the lung abnormality comprises pulmonary lesions.
96. The method of claim 95, wherein the pulmonary lesions are consistent with pneumonia.
97. An agent identified by the method of claim 77, claim 80, claim 81, claim 85, claim 89, or claim 93.
98. A transgenic mouse comprising a disruption in an cGMP phosphodiesterase gene, wherein the transgenic mouse exhibits an eye abnormality.
99. The transgenic mouse of claim 98, wherein the eye abnormality is a retinal abnormality.
100. The transgenic mouse of claim 99, wherein the retinal abnormality is characterized by retinal degeneration or retinal dysplasia.
101. The transgenic mouse of claim 100, wherein the transgenic mouse exhibits an absence of photoreceptor layers.
102. The transgenic mouse of claim 98, wherein the eye abnormality is consistent with vision problems or blindness.
103. The transgenic mouse of claim 99, wherein the retinal abnormality is consistent with retinitis pigmentosa.
104. The transgenic mouse of claim 98, wherein the eye abnormality comprises at least one of the following: thinning or vacuolation of the inner nuclear layer of the eye; thinning of the inner plexiform layer of the eye; loss of ganglion cell nuclei; gliosis of the nerve fiber layer; or attenuation of retinal vasculature.
105. The transgenic mouse of claim 98, wherein the transgenic mouse is heterozygous for a disruption in an cGMP phosphodiesterase gene.
106. The transgenic mouse of claim 98, wherein the transgenic mouse is homozygous for a disruption in an cGMP phosphodiesterase gene.
107. A method of producing a transgenic mouse comprising a disruption in an cGMP phosphodiesterase gene, wherein the transgenic mouse exhibits an eye abnormality, the method comprising:
(a) introducing an cGMP phosphodiesterase gene targeting construct into a cell; (b) introducing the cell into a blastocyst;
(c) implanting the resulting blastocyst into a pseudopregnant mouse, wherein said pseudopregnant mouse gives birth to a chimeric mouse; and
(d) breeding the chimeric mouse to produce the transgenic mouse comprising a disruption in an cGMP phosphodiesterase gene.
108. A transgenic mouse comprising a disruption in an cGMP phosphodiesterase gene, wherein the transgenic mouse exhibits at least one of the following phenotypes: an abnormality in the aorta; an abnormality of the kidney; an abnormality in the liver; an abnormality in the lymph nodes; an abnormality in the skin; increased body and organ weight; or elevated levels of ALT, phosphorus, potassium, or bilirubin.
109. A cell derived from the transgenic mouse of claim 98, claim 104, claim 107 or claim 108, wherein the cell comprises a disruption in an cGMP phosphodiesterase gene.
110. A method of identifying an agent that ameliorates an eye abnormality, the method comprising:
(a) administering an agent to a transgenic mouse comprising a disruption in an cGMP phosphodiesterase gene; and
(b) determining whether the agent ameliorates the eye abnormality of the transgenic mouse.
111. The method of claim 110, wherein the eye abnormality is a retinal abnormality.
112. The method of claim 111, wherein the retinal abnormality is characterized by retinal degeneration or retinal dysplasia.
113. The method of claim 110, wherein the transgenic mouse exhibits an absence of photoreceptor layers.
114. The method of claim 110, wherein the eye abnormality comprises at least one of the following: thinning or vacuolation of the inner nuclear layer of the eye; thinning of the inner plexiform layer of the eye; loss of ganglion cell nuclei in the eye; gliosis of the nerve fiber layer of the eye; or attenuation of retinal vasculature in the eye.
115. A method of identifying an agent which modulates cGMP phosphodiesterase gene expression, the method comprising:
(a) administering an agent to the transgenic mouse comprising a disruption in an cGMP phosphodiesterase gene; and
(b) determining whether the agent modulates cGMP phosphodiesterase gene expression in the transgenic mouse, wherein the agent modulates a phenotype associated with a disruption in an cGMP phosphodiesterase gene.
1 16. The method of claim 1 15, wherein the phenotype comprises any one of the following: an eye abnormality; abnormality of the aorta; an abnormality of the kidney; an abnormality of the liver; an abnormality of the lymph nodes; an abnormality of the skin; increased body weight or organ weight; or elevated levels of ALT, phosphorus, potassium, or bilirubin.
117. A method of identifying an agent which modulates a phenotype associated with a disruption in an cGMP phosphodiesterase gene, the method comprising:
(a) administering an agent to a transgenic mouse comprising a disruption in an cGMP phosphodiesterase gene; and (b) determining whether the agent modulates the phenotype.
118. The method of claim 117, wherein the phenotype comprises any one of the following: an eye abnormality; an abnormality of the aorta; an abnormality of the kidney; an abnormality of the liver; an abnormality of the lymph nodes; an abnormality of the skin; increased body weight or organ weight; or elevated levels of ALT, phosphorus, potassium, or bilirubin.
1 19. A method of identifying an agent which modulates cGMP phosphodiesterase gene expression, the method comprising:
(a) providing a cell comprising a disruption in cGMP phosphodiesterase gene;
(b) contacting the cell with an agent; and (c) determining whether the agent modulates cGMP phosphodiesterase gene expression, wherein the agent modulates a phenotype associated with a disruption in a cGMP phosphodiesterase gene.
120. The method of claim 119, wherein the phenotype comprises any one of the following: an eye abnormality; abnormality of the aorta; an abnormality of the kidney; an abnormality of the liver; an abnormality of the lymph nodes; an abnormality of the skin; increased body weight or organ weight; or elevated levels of ALT, phosphorus, potassium, or bilirubin.
121. A method of identifying an agent which modulates cGMP phosphodiesterase gene function, the method comprising:
(a) providing a cell comprising a disruption in a cGMP phosphodiesterase gene; (b) contacting the cell with an agent; and
(c) determining whether the agent modulates cGMP phosphodiesterase gene function, wherein the agent modulates a phenotype associated with a disruption in a cGMP phosphodiesterase gene.
122. The method of claim 121, wherein the phenotype comprises any one of the following: an eye abnormality; abnormality of the aorta; an abnormality of the kidney; an abnormality of the liver; an abnormality of the lymph nodes; an abnormality of the skin; increased body weight or organ weight; or elevated levels of ALT, phosphorus, potassium, or bilirubin.
123. An agent identified by the method of claim 1 10, claim 115, claim 117, claim 119 or claim 121.
124. A transgenic mouse comprising a disruption in a cGMP phosphodiesterase gene, wherein the transgenic mouse exhibits decreased anxiety behavior.
125. The transgenic mouse of claim 124, wherein the transgenic mouse is heterozygous for a disruption in an cGMP phosphodiesterase gene.
126. The transgenic mouse of claim 125, wherein the transgenic mouse is homozygous for a disruption in an cGMP phosphodiesterase gene.
127. A method of identifying an agent that ameliorates hyperactive behavior, the method comprising:
(a) administering an agent to a transgenic mouse comprising a disruption in an cGMP phosphodiesterase gene; and
(b) determining whether the agent ameliorates hyperactive behavior of the transgenic mouse.
128. A method of identifying an agent which modulates an cGMP phosphodiesterase gene expression, the method comprising: (a) administering an agent to the transgenic mouse comprising a disruption in an cGMP phosphodiesterase gene; and
(b) determining whether the agent modulates cGMP phosphodiesterase gene expression in the transgenic mouse, wherein the agent has an effect on hyperactive behavior of the transgenic mouse.
129. A method of identifying an agent which modulates a phenotype associated with a disruption in a cGMP phosphodiesterase gene, the method comprising:
(a) administering an agent to a transgenic mouse comprising a disruption in a cGMP phosphodiesterase gene; and
(b) determining whether the agent modulates hyperactive behavior of the transgenic mouse.
130. An agent identified by the method of claim 127, claim 128 or claim 129.
131. A transgenic mouse comprising a disruption in a sulfotransferase gene, wherein the transgenic mouse exhibits at least one of the following: aggressive, hyperactive, increased activity or decreased anxiety behavior.
132. The transgenic mouse of claim 131, wherein the transgenic mouse is heterozygous for a disruption in a sulfotransferase gene.
133. The transgenic mouse of claim 131, wherein the transgenic mouse is homozygous for a disruption in a sulfotransferase gene.
134. A method of producing a transgenic mouse comprising a disruption in a sulfotransferase gene, wherein the transgenic mouse exhibits at least one of the following: aggressive, hyperactive, increased activity or decreased anxiety behavior, the method comprising:
(a) introducing a sulfotransferase gene targeting construct into a cell;
(b) introducing the cell into a blastocyst; (c) implanting the resulting blastocyst into a pseudopregnant mouse, wherein said pseudopregnant mouse gives birth to a chimeric mouse; and (d) breeding the chimeric mouse to produce the transgenic mouse comprising a disruption in a sulfotransferase gene.
135. A cell derived from the transgenic mouse of claim 131 or claim 134, wherein the cell comprises a disruption in a sulfotransferase gene.
136. A method of identifying an agent that ameliorates a behavior associated with a disruption in a sulfotransferase gene, the method comprising:
(a) administering an agent to a transgenic mouse comprising a disruption in a sulfotransferase gene; and (b) determining whether the agent ameliorates aggressive, hyperactive, increased activity or decreased anxiety behavior of the transgenic mouse.
137. A method of identifying an agent which modulates sulfotransferase gene expression, the method comprising:
(a) administering an agent to the transgenic mouse comprising a disruption in a sulfotransferase gene; and
(b) determining whether the agent modulates sulfotransferase gene expression in the transgenic mouse, wherein the agent has an effect on aggressive, hyperactive, increased activity or decreased anxiety behavior of the transgenic mouse.
138. A method of identifying an agent which modulates a behavior associated with a disruption in a sulfotransferase gene, the method comprising:
(a) administering an agent to a transgenic mouse comprising a disruption in a sulfotransferase gene; and
(b) determining whether the agent modulates aggressive, hyperactive, increased activity or decreased anxiety behavior of the transgenic mouse .
139. An agent identified by the method of claim 136, claim 137 or claim 138.
140. A transgenic mouse comprising a disruption in a sulfotransferase gene, wherein the transgenic mouse exhibits at least one of the following: an abnormality in the liver or an abnormality in the salivary gland.
141. The transgenic mouse of claim 140, wherein the abnormality in the liver is characterized by at least one of the following: hepatocyte abnormalities, anisocytosis, anisonucleosis, and increased mitotic cellular activity in the liver.
142. A transgenic mouse comprising a disruption in a sulfotransferase gene, wherein the abnormality in the salivary gland is characterized by at least one of the following: focal pigment deposition, atrophy or fibrosis in the salivary gland.
143. A method of identifying an agent which modulates sulfotransferase gene expression, the method comprising: (a) administering an agent to the transgenic mouse comprising a disruption in a sulfotransferase gene; and
(b) determining whether the agent modulates sulfotransferase gene expression in the transgenic mouse, wherein the agent modulates a phenotype associated with a disruption in sulfotransferase gene.
144. The method of claim 143, wherein the phenotype comprises any one of the following: an abnormality in the liver or an abnormality in the salivary gland.
145. A method of identifying an agent which modulates a phenotype associated with a disruption in a sulfotransferase gene, the method comprising:
(a) administering an agent to a transgenic mouse comprising a disruption in a sulfotransferase gene; and
(b) determining whether the agent modulates the phenotype.
146. The method of claim 145, wherein the phenotype comprises any one of the following: an abnormality in the liver or an abnormality in the salivary gland.
147. A method of identifying an agent which modulates sulfotransferase gene expression, the method comprising:
(a) providing a cell compπsing a disruption in a sulfotransferase gene;
(b) contacting the cell with an agent; and
(c) determining whether the agent modulates sulfotransferase gene expression, wherein the agent modulates a phenotype associated with a disruption in a sulfotransferase gene.
148. The method of claim 147, wherein the phenotype comprises any one of the following: an abnormality in the liver or an abnormality in the salivary gland.
149. A method of identifying an agent which modulates sulfotransferase function, the method comprising: (a) providing a cell comprising a disruption in a sulfotransferase gene;
(b) contacting the cell with an agent; and (c) determining whether the agent modulates sulfotransferase gene function, wherein the agent modulates a phenotype associated with a disruption in a sulfotransferase gene.
150. The method of claim 149, wherein the phenotype comprises any one of the following: an abnormality in the liver or an abnormality in the salivary gland.
151. A method of identifying an agent which modulates sulfotransferase gene expression, the method comprising:
(a) administering an agent to the transgenic mouse comprising a disruption in a sulfotransferase gene; and
(b) determining whether the agent modulates sulfotransferase gene expression in the transgenic mouse, wherein the agent modulates a phenotype associated with a disruption in a phosphatase gene.
152. The method of claiml51, wherein the phenotype comprises any one of the following: an abnormality in the liver or an abnormality in the salivary gland.
153. An agent identified by the method of claim 143, claim 145, claim 147, claim 149 or claim 151.
154. A method of producing a transgenic mouse comprising a disruption in a sulfotransferase gene, wherein the transgenic mouse exhibits at least one of the following: an abnormality in the liver or an abnormality in the salivary glands, the method comprising:
(a) introducing a sulfotransferase gene targeting construct into a cell; (b) introducing the cell into a blastocyst;
(c) implanting the resulting blastocyst into a pseudopregnant mouse, wherein said pseudopregnant mouse gives birth to a chimeric mouse; and
(d) breeding the chimeric mouse to produce the transgenic mouse comprising a disruption in a sulfotransferase gene.
155. A cell derived from the transgenic mouse of claim 140 or claim 154.
EP01918805A 2000-03-16 2001-03-16 Transgenic mice containing targeted gene disruptions Withdrawn EP1304920A2 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (37)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US19034800P 2000-03-16 2000-03-16
US190348P 2000-03-16
US19123500P 2000-03-22 2000-03-22
US19123600P 2000-03-22 2000-03-22
US19114200P 2000-03-22 2000-03-22
US19124000P 2000-03-22 2000-03-22
US19112900P 2000-03-22 2000-03-22
US19112800P 2000-03-22 2000-03-22
US191142P 2000-03-22
US191240P 2000-03-22
US191128P 2000-03-22
US191129P 2000-03-22
US191236P 2000-03-22
US191235P 2000-03-22
US20422700P 2000-05-15 2000-05-15
US20423000P 2000-05-15 2000-05-15
US204230P 2000-05-15
US204227P 2000-05-15
US21521400P 2000-06-29 2000-06-29
US215214P 2000-06-29
US21626400P 2000-07-06 2000-07-06
US21624900P 2000-07-06 2000-07-06
US21676500P 2000-07-06 2000-07-06
US216249P 2000-07-06
US216765P 2000-07-06
US216264P 2000-07-06
US21807500P 2000-07-12 2000-07-12
US218075P 2000-07-12
US21916700P 2000-07-19 2000-07-19
US21918200P 2000-07-19 2000-07-19
US219167P 2000-07-19
US219182P 2000-07-19
US22148500P 2000-07-27 2000-07-27
US221485P 2000-07-27
US22317300P 2000-08-07 2000-08-07
US223173P 2000-08-07
PCT/US2001/008664 WO2001067855A2 (en) 2000-03-16 2001-03-16 Transgenic mice containing targeted gene disruptions

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
EP1304920A2 true EP1304920A2 (en) 2003-05-02

Family

ID=27586188

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
EP01918805A Withdrawn EP1304920A2 (en) 2000-03-16 2001-03-16 Transgenic mice containing targeted gene disruptions

Country Status (6)

Country Link
EP (1) EP1304920A2 (en)
JP (1) JP2004500102A (en)
AU (1) AU2001245843A1 (en)
CA (1) CA2402912A1 (en)
IL (1) IL151759A0 (en)
WO (1) WO2001067855A2 (en)

Families Citing this family (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2002004621A2 (en) * 2000-07-11 2002-01-17 Deltagen, Inc. Methods of creating constructs useful for introducing sequences into embryonic stem cells
US20020116729A1 (en) * 2000-12-06 2002-08-22 Allen Keith D. Transgenic mice containing NTTP1 phosphatase gene disruptions
US9233245B2 (en) 2004-02-20 2016-01-12 Brainsgate Ltd. SPG stimulation
US8010189B2 (en) 2004-02-20 2011-08-30 Brainsgate Ltd. SPG stimulation for treating complications of subarachnoid hemorrhage
US8055347B2 (en) 2005-08-19 2011-11-08 Brainsgate Ltd. Stimulation for treating brain events and other conditions
EP2878335B1 (en) 2013-11-10 2018-01-03 Brainsgate Ltd. Implant and delivery system for neural stimulator
US10271907B2 (en) 2015-05-13 2019-04-30 Brainsgate Ltd. Implant and delivery system for neural stimulator

Family Cites Families (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH08504104A (en) * 1993-05-18 1996-05-07 アンスティテュー・ナシオナル・ドゥ・ラ・サンテ・エ・ドゥ・ラ・ルシェルシュ・メディカル Genetically engineered mice containing alterations in the gene encoding the retinoic acid receptor protein
JP2001525197A (en) * 1997-12-12 2001-12-11 メルク エンド カムパニー インコーポレーテッド DNA molecule encoding human nuclear receptor protein nNR5
WO2000008052A1 (en) * 1998-08-07 2000-02-17 Tularik Inc. A novel retinal nuclear hormone receptor

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
See references of WO0167855A3 *

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP2004500102A (en) 2004-01-08
WO2001067855A3 (en) 2003-02-13
AU2001245843A1 (en) 2001-09-24
IL151759A0 (en) 2003-04-10
CA2402912A1 (en) 2001-09-20
WO2001067855A2 (en) 2001-09-20

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US20060160211A1 (en) Transgenic mice containing, cGMP phosphodiesterase gene disruptions
US20030106083A1 (en) Transgenic mice containing RPTPB tyrosine phosphatase gene disruptions
EP1304920A2 (en) Transgenic mice containing targeted gene disruptions
WO2002045498A2 (en) Transgenic mice containing channel protein target gene disruptions
WO2002048345A2 (en) Transgenic mice containing glutamate receptor (grik5) gene disruptions
US20030079243A1 (en) Transgenic mice containing TRP6 calcium ion channel gene disruptions
US20060253915A1 (en) Transgenic Mice Containing Kir3.3 Potassium Channel Gene Disruptions
US20020116730A1 (en) Transgenic mice containing PERK protein kinase gene disruptions
US20020108138A1 (en) Transgenic mice containing RORgamma gene disruptions
US20060150265A1 (en) Transgenic mice containing sulfotransferase gene disruptions
US20040040046A1 (en) Transgenic mice containing retina-specific nuclear receptor gene disruptions
WO2002003793A2 (en) Transgenic mice containing targeted gene disruptions
US20060172413A1 (en) Transgenic mice containing melanocyte stimulating hormone receptor gene disruptions
US20020133839A1 (en) Transgenic mice containing Kir2.3 potassium channel gene disruptions
US20030023998A1 (en) Transgenic mice containing 5-HT-2B gene disruptions
US20030131369A1 (en) Metabotropic glutamate receptor 4B (mGluR4) disruptions, compositions and methods relating thereto
WO2002047478A2 (en) Transgenic mice containing proliferator-activated receptor gene disruptions
WO2002079378A2 (en) Transgenic mice containing gpcr-like transmembrane protein disruptions
US20020133840A1 (en) Transgenic mice containing disruptions in genes encoding A2D2 calcium ion channel subunit proteins
US20020023275A1 (en) Transgenic mice containing matrix metalloprotease gene disruptions
US20060212955A1 (en) Transgenic mice containing lymphoid-specific GPCR gene disruptions
US20020162132A1 (en) Transgenic mice containing DEZ orphan receptor gene disruptions
US20020177134A1 (en) Transgenic mice containing PAFR gene disruptions
US20020068324A1 (en) Transgenic mice containing melanocortin-3 receptor gene disruptions
US20020162133A1 (en) Transgenic mice containing mGluR8 metabotropic glutamate receptor gene disruptions

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
PUAI Public reference made under article 153(3) epc to a published international application that has entered the european phase

Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: 0009012

17P Request for examination filed

Effective date: 20021016

AK Designated contracting states

Designated state(s): AT BE CH CY DE DK ES FI FR GB GR IE IT LI LU MC NL PT SE TR

AX Request for extension of the european patent

Extension state: AL LT LV MK RO SI

STAA Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent

Free format text: STATUS: THE APPLICATION IS DEEMED TO BE WITHDRAWN

18D Application deemed to be withdrawn

Effective date: 20041001